UG SoftMaster 200 V1.7

Honeywell Process Solutions
SoftMaster
User's Guide
ML200-SoftMaster
R200
11/09
Release 200
Honeywell
Notices and Trademarks

Copyright 2009 by Honeywell International Inc.
Release 200 November, 2009
While this information is current in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express
warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customers.
In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages. The
information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice.
Honeywell, PlantScape, Experion PKS, and TotalPlant are registered trademarks of Honeywell
International Inc.
Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Honeywell International
Process Solutions
2500 West Union Hills
Phoenix, AZ 85027
1-800 343-0228
ii
SoftMaster User's Guide

Honeywell
R200
11/09
About This Document

The document describes the operations involved in using SoftMaster to program and
debug the MasterLogic 200 PLC series.
Release Information
Document Name
Document
ID
Release
Number
Publication
Date
SoftMaster User's Guide - ML200
ML200SoftMaster
200
11/09
References
The following list identifies all documents that may be sources of reference for material discussed
in this publication.
Document Title
2MLI CPUU Users Guide
Contacts
World Wide Web
The following Honeywell web sites may be of interest to Process Solution customers.
Honeywell Organization
WWW Address (URL)
Corporate
http://www.honeywell.com
Process Solutions
http://www.honeywell.com/ps
R200
11/09

Honeywell
iii
Contacts
Telephone
Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed as follows.
iv
Location
Organization
Phone
United States
and Canada
Honeywell IAC Solution

Support Center
1-800-822-7673
Europe
Honeywell TAC-EMEA
+32-2-728-2704
Pacific
Honeywell Global TAC Pacific
1300-300-4822
(toll free within Australia)
+61-8-9362-9559
(outside Australia)
India
Honeywell Global TAC India
+91-20-2682-2458
Korea
Honeywell Global TAC Korea
+82-2-799-6317
Peoples
Republic of
China
Honeywell Global TAC China
+86-10-8458-3280 ext. 361
Singapore
Honeywell Global TAC South East Asia
+65-6580-3500
Taiwan
Honeywell Global TAC Taiwan
+886-7-323-5900
Japan
Honeywell Global TAC Japan
+81-3-5440-1303
Elsewhere
Call your nearest

Honeywell office

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Acronyms & definitions

Acronym/Term
Definition
A/D
Analog to Digital Conversion
Base
Base is the back plane of the PLC on which the power

supply, communication and other modules gets installed
Examples: Main base, expansion base.
BCD
Binary Coded Decimal
Cold Restart
This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the

variable parameters of the I/O image area when the CPU
is restarted. With the CPU restart mode set to cold restart,
all the parameters (like the internal register, timer and
counter) initialize to zero.
CPU
Central Processing Unit
D/A
Digital to Analog Conversion
Direct variable
Memory area which can be directly accessed with IEC

standard addressing notations with or without any variable
name.They are %I (input), %Q (output), and %M (internal
flags & registers) variables.
Address Examples: %IX0.0.2, %QW1.2.1, and %MD1234
Dnet
DeviceNet Network.
FEnet
Fast Ethernet Network.
FO
Fiber-Optic
Function
Is an operation unit that immediately outputs the operation

results for an input such as four arithmetical operations
and comparative operations.
Function Block
Is an operation unit, that memorizes the operation results

within the commands such as timer and counter or results
derived from several scans. Function blocks are the
fundamental element for logic programs. function blocks
like timer and counter have input and output connections
to indicate the flow.
HSL
R200
11/09
High Speed Link Service in MasterLogic-200

communication modules
Honeywell
Acronym/Term
Definition
I/O
Input / Output
I/O image area
Internal memory area of CPU module installed to maintain

I/O states.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
Interrupt Task
Interrupt driven task programs executed on meeting a

given condition in addition to regular scan programs. It
consists of 2 types
Timer interrupt task
Internal flag Interrupt task
KB
Kilo Bytes
KStep
Kilo Steps
LSB
Least Significant Bit
MB
Mega Bytes
ML-200
MasterLogic-200
Module
A standard component with a specific function to configure

a system, such as the I/O board assembled to be inserted
into the base motherboard.
Examples: CPU module, power module, and I/O module.
vi
MSB
Most Significant Bit
O/S
Operating System
P2P
Point to Point Service in MasterLogic-200 communication

modules
PAC
Process Automation Controller
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
PLC System
A system consisting of a PLC, CPU, modules and

peripherals configured to be controlled by a user program.
Pnet
Profibus-DP Network.
RAM
Random Access Memory

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Acronym/Term
RTC
As an abbreviation of Real Time Clock, it is collectively

referred as a universal IC, with the function of a clock.
RTC
Real Time Clock
Snet
Serial Link Network.
SoftMaster
Programming tool for creating, editing, and debugging a

program.
STP
Shielded Twisted Pair
Symbolic variable
Named Variables which are declared with a name, type

but address is automatically allocated in symbolic memory
area (%A) by the CPU. For instance, named variables
declared as Valve1, Pump2 or Speed3 with any IEC
standard data type.
TP
Twisted Pair cables (typically CAT5 cables with RJ45

connectors for Ethernet communication)
UTP
Unshield Twisted Pair
Warm Restart
This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the

variable parameters of the I/O image area when the CPU
is restarted. With the CPU restart mode is set to warm
restart, all the parameters (like the internal register, timer
and counter) retain the previous values.
Watchdog Timer
R200
11/09
Definition
A timer to monitor pre-determined execution time of a

program and to generate a warning, when it is not
complete within the time.

Honeywell
vii
viii

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Symbol Definitions
Symbol Definitions
The following table lists those symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions.
Symbol
Definition
ATTENTION: Identifies information that requires special
consideration.
TIP: Identifies advice or hints for the user, often in terms of

performing a task.
REFERENCE -EXTERNAL: Identifies an additional source of
information outside of the bookset.
REFERENCE - INTERNAL: Identifies an additional source of
information within the bookset.
CAUTION
Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, may result in equipment

or work (data) on the system being damaged or lost, or may result in
the inability to properly operate the process.
CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used
to alert against unsafe practices.
CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the product
manual for additional information. The symbol appears next to
required information in the manual.
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not
avoided, could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING symbol on the equipment refers the user to the product
manual for additional information. The symbol appears next to
required information in the manual.
WARNING, Risk of electrical shock: Potential shock hazard where
HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, or
60 VDC may be accessible.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
ix
Symbol Definitions
Symbol
Definition
ESD HAZARD: Danger of an electro-static discharge to which
equipment may be sensitive. Observe precautions for handling
electrostatic sensitive devices.
Protective Earth (PE) terminal: Provided for connection of the
protective earth (green or green/yellow) supply system conductor.
Functional earth terminal: Used for non-safety purposes such as

noise immunity improvement. NOTE: This connection shall be
bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance
with national local electrical code requirements.
Earth Ground: Functional earth connection. NOTE: This
connection shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of
supply in accordance with national and local electrical code
requirements.
Chassis Ground: Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of
the equipment shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of
supply in accordance with national and local electrical code
requirements.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Contents
1.
INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................25
1.1
Features of SoftMaster ................................................................................. 25
1.2
System Requirements .................................................................................. 27
2.
INSTALLATION ...........................................................................29
2.1
SoftMaster Installation.................................................................................. 29
Installing SoftMaster.............................................................................................................29
2.2
USB Device Driver Installation..................................................................... 34
Installing the USB Device driver...........................................................................................34

Verifying the USB device driver installation..........................................................................41
3.
BASIC APPLICATION .................................................................53

3.1
SoftMaster user interface ............................................................................. 53
Understanding the SoftMaster user interface .......................................................................53

Menu bar ..............................................................................................................................54
Tool Bar................................................................................................................................68
Status Display Line ..............................................................................................................70
Change View Window ..........................................................................................................71
Application of dialog box ......................................................................................................75
3.2
Open/Close Project ....................................................................................... 77
Open Project ........................................................................................................................77

Close Project........................................................................................................................77
Save Project.........................................................................................................................78
3.3
Edit Functions ............................................................................................... 79
Cut-Paste .............................................................................................................................79
Copy Paste........................................................................................................................80
Drag and Drop......................................................................................................................80
3.4
Shortcut Keys ................................................................................................ 81
Configuring shortcut keys.....................................................................................................81
3.5
Edit Window Zoom In, Zoom Out................................................................. 83
Zooming in/Zooming out ......................................................................................................83
3.6
Customizing SoftMaster ............................................................................... 84
Configuring SoftMaster options ............................................................................................85

R200
11/09

Honeywell
xi
Contents
Symbol Definitions
Configuring LD option.......................................................................................................... 92
Configuring SFC option ....................................................................................................... 94
Configuring ST option.......................................................................................................... 96
4.
PROJECT CONFIGURATION ..................................................... 99

4.1
Overview of Project Configuration ..............................................................99
Project configuration window............................................................................................... 99
4.2
Project Management....................................................................................101
Creating a new project ...................................................................................................... 101

Opening the Project........................................................................................................... 102
Opening a project from PLC .............................................................................................. 103
Saving a Project ................................................................................................................ 104
Saving Project as .............................................................................................................. 104
4.3
Project Item ..................................................................................................106
Add item ............................................................................................................................ 106

Adding a Program ............................................................................................................. 112
Exporting to file.................................................................................................................. 114
Importing from file.............................................................................................................. 116
Changing program execution sequence............................................................................ 123
Comparing Projects........................................................................................................... 125
4.4
Project Password.........................................................................................127
Setting Project password................................................................................................... 127

Deleting Password ............................................................................................................ 131
5.
VARIABLES .............................................................................. 133

5.1
Overview of variables..................................................................................133
5.2
Global/Direct Variable .................................................................................133
Global Variable.................................................................................................................. 133

Comment of a Direct Variable ........................................................................................... 134
Flag ................................................................................................................................... 135
5.3
Global/Direct Variable Edit .........................................................................137
Global/Direct Variable Registration ................................................................................... 137

Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste ............................................................................................. 139
Changing variable name ................................................................................................... 144
Insert line........................................................................................................................... 146
Delete line ......................................................................................................................... 147
Automatic fill ...................................................................................................................... 148
Drag & Drop ...................................................................................................................... 151
Undo/Redo ........................................................................................................................ 153
Export to file ...................................................................................................................... 154
xii

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Contents
Symbol Definitions
Registering Special Module Variables................................................................................154

Preview ..............................................................................................................................156
Print....................................................................................................................................157
Other functions...................................................................................................................157
5.4
Local Variable .............................................................................................. 160
Local Variable ....................................................................................................................160
5.5
Local Variable Edit ...................................................................................... 161
Local Variable Registration ................................................................................................161

Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste..............................................................................................163
Add EXTERNAL Variable...................................................................................................163
5.6
Function Block Variable ............................................................................. 165
FB Variable ........................................................................................................................165
5.7
FB Variable Edit........................................................................................... 166
FB Variable Registration ....................................................................................................166

Add EXTERNAL Variable...................................................................................................168
5.8
FUNCTION Variable..................................................................................... 170
FUN Variable......................................................................................................................170
5.9
FUN Variable Edit ........................................................................................ 171
FUN Variable Registration..................................................................................................171

Export to file .......................................................................................................................173
5.10
Editing Variables ..................................................................................... 174
Variable Registration ..........................................................................................................174

Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste Insert Line, Delete Line, Automatic fill, Drag and Drop,
Undo/Redo .........................................................................................................................175
Export to file .......................................................................................................................175
5.11
User-defined Function/Function Block ................................................. 176
Creating User-defined Function/Function Block Program ..................................................177

Creating User-defined Function/Function Block I/O Variable .............................................179
User-defined Function/Function Block Programming .........................................................180
Using User-defined Function/Function Blocks....................................................................183
6.
LD EDIT......................................................................................187
6.1
Overview ...................................................................................................... 187
6.2
Limits............................................................................................................ 187
6.3
Program Edit................................................................................................ 188
Edit Tools ...........................................................................................................................188

Input Contact point .............................................................................................................190
R200
11/09

Honeywell
xiii
Contents
Symbol Definitions
Input OR contact point....................................................................................................... 191

Entering Variable/Address................................................................................................. 193
Inserting lines .................................................................................................................... 196
Inserting Coil ..................................................................................................................... 197
Inserting a function block................................................................................................... 198
Favorite Function Block ..................................................................................................... 200
Entering comments ........................................................................................................... 205
Input Label ........................................................................................................................ 208
Insert Extension Function .................................................................................................. 210
Insert Cell .......................................................................................................................... 211
Insert Line ......................................................................................................................... 212
Delete Item ........................................................................................................................ 213
Delete Cell......................................................................................................................... 214
Delete Line ........................................................................................................................ 215
Copy/Cut/Paste ................................................................................................................. 215
Undo and Redo ................................................................................................................. 217
Program Edit Mode ........................................................................................................... 218
6.4
Viewing Program Options...........................................................................221
View IL Program................................................................................................................ 221

Program Magnification Change ......................................................................................... 222
View Address .................................................................................................................... 222
View Variables................................................................................................................... 223
View Address/Variables .................................................................................................... 223
View Address/Comment .................................................................................................... 224
View Variables/Comments ................................................................................................ 224
Adjust No. of Contact Point ............................................................................................... 225
LD View Properties............................................................................................................ 226
6.5
Additional Edit Function .............................................................................228
Optimize Program ............................................................................................................. 228

Block Mask Instruction ...................................................................................................... 229
Bookmark .......................................................................................................................... 231
Go To ................................................................................................................................ 236
SFC EDIT................................................................................... 243
7.
7.1
Overview .......................................................................................................243
7.2
SFC program limitations .............................................................................243
7.3
Program Edit ................................................................................................244
Edit Tools .......................................................................................................................... 244

Input step/transition ........................................................................................................... 245
Input Action ....................................................................................................................... 247
Input Block/Transition........................................................................................................ 248
Input label.......................................................................................................................... 249
Input Jump ........................................................................................................................ 250
xiv

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Contents
Symbol Definitions
Create left branch...............................................................................................................251

Create right branch ............................................................................................................254
Edit Step Property ..............................................................................................................258
Transition property .............................................................................................................259
Action property ...................................................................................................................260
Edit Block Property.............................................................................................................264
Edit label property ..............................................................................................................266
Jump property ....................................................................................................................267
Set Branch Priority .............................................................................................................268
Erase Branch Priority .........................................................................................................270
Delete item .........................................................................................................................270
Copy/Cut/Paste ..................................................................................................................271
Cut/Paste ...........................................................................................................................273
Undo and Redo ..................................................................................................................274
Program Edit Mode ............................................................................................................276
7.4
View Program .............................................................................................. 277
Program zoom In/Out.........................................................................................................277

SFC Property .....................................................................................................................277
View Block/Action/Transition List .......................................................................................284
Open Action/Transition.......................................................................................................285
Address/Variables ..............................................................................................................285
Address/Comments............................................................................................................286
Adjust Contact No. .............................................................................................................286
7.5
Edit additional Function ............................................................................. 288
Bookmark setting ...............................................................................................................288

Go To .................................................................................................................................291
8.
PROGRAMMING........................................................................299
8.1
Cross Reference.......................................................................................... 299
View All Addresses ............................................................................................................299

Data Sorting .......................................................................................................................300
Output Cross Reference Instantly ......................................................................................302
Check Duplicate Coil Instantly............................................................................................303
8.2
Used Address .............................................................................................. 306
Viewing Used Address .......................................................................................................306

View Address Uses ............................................................................................................308
8.3
Check Program............................................................................................ 310
Check Program Setting ......................................................................................................310

Check Result Trace............................................................................................................314
Logic Error..........................................................................................................................315
Grammar Error ...................................................................................................................320
R200
11/09

Honeywell
xv
Contents
Symbol Definitions
9.
FIND/REPLACE......................................................................... 333
9.1
Find Address................................................................................................333
Find Next Address............................................................................................................. 335

Find All Address ................................................................................................................ 338
9.2
Find Text .......................................................................................................340
Finding text........................................................................................................................ 340

Find All String .................................................................................................................... 345
9.3
Address Replacement .................................................................................347
Replace Address ............................................................................................................... 347

Replace All Addresses ...................................................................................................... 350
9.4
Text Replacement ........................................................................................354
Replace text string............................................................................................................. 354

Replace All String.............................................................................................................. 357
9.5
10.
Find Again ....................................................................................................360
PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 361
10.1
Basic Parameter .......................................................................................361
Basic Parameter Setting.................................................................................................... 361
10.2
I/O Parameters..........................................................................................369
Setting I/O parameters ...................................................................................................... 369

Base Module Setup ........................................................................................................... 371
Module Information Setting Based on Slots ...................................................................... 372
I/O Parameter Edit Function .............................................................................................. 374
Detailed Module Information Setting ................................................................................. 377
I/O Parameter Print Function............................................................................................. 386
11.
ONLINE...................................................................................... 389
11.1
Connection Options for the PLC ............................................................389
Local Connection Setting .................................................................................................. 389

Using the Local RS-232C.................................................................................................. 390
Using the Local USB ......................................................................................................... 392
Remote 1 Connect Setting ................................................................................................ 392
Remote 2 Connect Setting ................................................................................................ 396
11.2
Online Functions......................................................................................397
Connect ............................................................................................................................. 397

Write.................................................................................................................................. 401
Read.................................................................................................................................. 402
Change Mode.................................................................................................................... 403
Compare with PLC ............................................................................................................ 404
xvi

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Contents
Symbol Definitions
Reset PLC..........................................................................................................................405
Clearing PLC data..............................................................................................................407
PLC Information .................................................................................................................409
Password ...........................................................................................................................411
PLC History ........................................................................................................................416
PLC Error/Warning.............................................................................................................421
Flash Memory Setting ........................................................................................................422
Force I/O Setting ................................................................................................................425
Force I/O Setting ................................................................................................................427
Forced I/O Cancel ..............................................................................................................431
Skip I/O setting...................................................................................................................433
Fault Mask..........................................................................................................................442
11.3
12.
Module Changing Wizard........................................................................ 445
MONITORING ............................................................................451
12.1
Monitoring ................................................................................................ 451
Start/Stop Monitoring .........................................................................................................451

Change Current Value .......................................................................................................451
Pause/Restart Monitoring...................................................................................................454
Pausing Conditions ............................................................................................................454
12.2
LD Program Monitoring .......................................................................... 457
Start/Stop monitoring .........................................................................................................459
12.3
Variable Monitoring ................................................................................. 460
Registering Variable/Comment ..........................................................................................461

Register All.........................................................................................................................464
Register by user .................................................................................................................466
Drag and Drop Register from other windows .....................................................................467
View Detailed/Briefly ..........................................................................................................469
Monitoring operations.........................................................................................................472
Find ....................................................................................................................................473
Print....................................................................................................................................473
Shortcut Keys.....................................................................................................................474
Alignment ...........................................................................................................................474
12.4
System Monitoring .................................................................................. 476
Basic Application................................................................................................................476
Connect/Disconnect ...........................................................................................................477
System Synchronization.....................................................................................................477
All I/O modules ON/OFF ....................................................................................................478
Selected I/O modules ON/OFF ..........................................................................................479
Change Current Value .......................................................................................................479
Information Display of Power Module.................................................................................480
Information Display of CPU module ...................................................................................482
Information Display of Communication Module ..................................................................483
R200
11/09

Honeywell
xvii
Contents
Symbol Definitions
Viewing Information of Special Modules............................................................................ 486

Start/Stop Monitoring......................................................................................................... 488
Special Module Monitoring ................................................................................................ 488
Save .................................................................................................................................. 490
Open ................................................................................................................................. 490
Navigate Base ................................................................................................................... 491
Print Preview ..................................................................................................................... 491
12.5
Address Monitoring .................................................................................493
Basic Application ............................................................................................................... 493

Address Areas................................................................................................................... 494
Data Format and Display Items ......................................................................................... 494
Edit Data ........................................................................................................................... 495
Save Address .................................................................................................................... 496
Open Address ................................................................................................................... 498
Data Value Setting ............................................................................................................ 500
Clear Data ......................................................................................................................... 503
Write to PLC ...................................................................................................................... 504
Read from PLC.................................................................................................................. 506
Write Selected Area on PLC ............................................................................................. 507
Start/Stop Monitoring......................................................................................................... 507
Change Current Value....................................................................................................... 508
PLC Type Settings ............................................................................................................ 510
Screen Zoom-In/Zoom-Out ............................................................................................... 510
Automatic Width/Height Adjustment .................................................................................. 510
View Properties ................................................................................................................. 511
Page Setting...................................................................................................................... 512
12.6
Special Module Monitoring .....................................................................514
12.7
Trend Monitoring......................................................................................517
Configuring Trend Monitoring ............................................................................................ 517

Start Trend Monitoring....................................................................................................... 519
Setting Trend Graph.......................................................................................................... 521
Setting graph ..................................................................................................................... 522
Setting Graph Window ...................................................................................................... 526
Graph function................................................................................................................... 527
Scroll Synchronization....................................................................................................... 527
12.8
Data Traces...............................................................................................532
Connecting to PLC ............................................................................................................ 535

Trace Setting ..................................................................................................................... 535
Graph settings ................................................................................................................... 541
Trace ................................................................................................................................. 543
Animation .......................................................................................................................... 544
Graph Function.................................................................................................................. 546
File function ....................................................................................................................... 546
View Function.................................................................................................................... 548
xviii

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Contents
Symbol Definitions
12.9
Custom Events......................................................................................... 551
Overview of Custom events ...............................................................................................551

Event Setting......................................................................................................................556
Adding Custom Event Item.................................................................................................558
Event History......................................................................................................................566
13.
DEBUGGING..............................................................................573
13.1
Start/Stop Debugging.............................................................................. 573
Start Debugging .................................................................................................................573

Stop Debugging .................................................................................................................573
13.2
LD Program Debugging .......................................................................... 575
Set/Remove Breakpoints....................................................................................................575
Go ......................................................................................................................................578
Go to Cursor.......................................................................................................................579
Step Into.............................................................................................................................580
13.3
List of Break Points................................................................................. 587
13.4
Variable Break.......................................................................................... 589
Setting Variable Break .......................................................................................................589
13.5
Scan Break ............................................................................................... 592
Scan Break Run .................................................................................................................593
14.
ONLINE EDITING.......................................................................595
14.1
Online Editing Sequence ........................................................................ 595
Open Project ......................................................................................................................596

Connect..............................................................................................................................596
Start Monitoring..................................................................................................................596
Start Online Editing ............................................................................................................596
Edit .....................................................................................................................................597
Write Modified Program......................................................................................................598
End Online Editing .............................................................................................................598
15.
PRINTING...................................................................................601
15.1
Print Project ............................................................................................. 601
Printing a Project................................................................................................................601
Print Setting........................................................................................................................602
Page Setup ........................................................................................................................603
Header/Footer Setting ........................................................................................................604
Cover Setup .......................................................................................................................606
R200
11/09

Honeywell
xix
Contents
Symbol Definitions
15.2
LD Program Print .....................................................................................610
Print Setting....................................................................................................................... 610

Print Preview ..................................................................................................................... 612
16.
USER FUNCTION/FUNCTION BLOCK..................................... 613
16.1
Overview ...................................................................................................613
16.2
Create User Function/Function Block....................................................614
Create User Function/Function Block Program ................................................................. 614
16.3
Create User Function/Function Block I/O Variable...............................617
16.4
User Function/Function Block Programming .......................................619
16.5
Working with User Function/Function Block ........................................622
17.
SOFTMASTER SIMULATOR .................................................... 625
17.1
Overview of the SoftMaster Simulator (SIM) .........................................625
Features of SoftMaster-SIM .............................................................................................. 625

System configuration for execution of SoftMaster-SIM...................................................... 625
Starting SoftMaster-SIM .................................................................................................... 626
17.2
Program window configuration ..............................................................629
Configuring the Program window ...................................................................................... 629

Channel list ....................................................................................................................... 630
Channel monitor ................................................................................................................ 631
I/O condition ...................................................................................................................... 632
I/O condition monitor ......................................................................................................... 646
Module simulation ............................................................................................................. 648
Digital I/O module.............................................................................................................. 649
Analog output module (D/A conversion module) ............................................................... 651
High Speed counter module (HSC Module) ...................................................................... 652
RTD module ...................................................................................................................... 653
Advanced positioning module (APM module).................................................................... 654
17.3
Limitations ................................................................................................662
Watchdog timer ................................................................................................................. 662

Communication module..................................................................................................... 662
18.
ST EDITION ............................................................................... 663
18.1
Writing ST program..................................................................................663
Adding Scan Program ....................................................................................................... 663

Adding User Function/Function Block ............................................................................... 664
Adding SFC transition, action ............................................................................................ 666
xx

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Contents
Symbol Definitions
18.2
Limit .......................................................................................................... 669
18.3
Editing Program....................................................................................... 670
Shortcut keys .....................................................................................................................670

Copy/Paste.........................................................................................................................671
Undo/Redo .........................................................................................................................672
Adding/Selecting variable...................................................................................................673
Inserting Function/Function Block ......................................................................................675
18.4
Viewing Program ..................................................................................... 677
ST option............................................................................................................................677
Font/Color ..........................................................................................................................679
Zoom ..................................................................................................................................680
Tab.....................................................................................................................................680
Showing line numbers ........................................................................................................681
18.5
Additional Edition Function.................................................................... 682
Book mark ..........................................................................................................................682

Selection from character string list .....................................................................................685
Selecting member variable from character string list..........................................................686
Setting/Removing Block Mask............................................................................................687
Setting/Removing Line Block Mask....................................................................................690
Indent/Outdent ...................................................................................................................693
19.
EVENT INPUT MODULE............................................................695
19.1
Overview................................................................................................... 695
Characteristics of SOE Monitor ..........................................................................................695

Functions of the SOE Monitor ............................................................................................695
Files Created in the SOE Monitor.......................................................................................696
19.2
Screen Configuration .............................................................................. 696
Menu structure ...................................................................................................................697

Tools ..................................................................................................................................699
SOE Event History Window................................................................................................700
Status Bar ..........................................................................................................................701
19.3
Basic Parameter Setting ......................................................................... 702
Setting Items ......................................................................................................................702
19.4
I/O Parameter Setting .............................................................................. 703
Setting Item ........................................................................................................................703

Chatter Setting ...................................................................................................................706
19.5
View Module Information ........................................................................ 708
19.6
Event History Monitor ............................................................................. 710
Example of Event filter .......................................................................................................714

Prioritizing Events .............................................................................................................714
R200
11/09

Honeywell
xxi
Contents
Symbol Definitions
Comparing Events............................................................................................................. 716

Deleting Event history ....................................................................................................... 717
19.7
20.
Save as an Excel File ...............................................................................718
DEDICATED ML200R FUNCTION ............................................ 719
20.1
Redundancy Parameter ...........................................................................719
20.2
Redundancy PLC State Window.............................................................722
20.3
Control Redundancy................................................................................723
Change of master CPU ..................................................................................................... 723

Standby CPU control......................................................................................................... 724
20.4
System Monitoring...................................................................................725
System Configuration ....................................................................................................... 725

Node Count Change.......................................................................................................... 727
Base Information .............................................................................................................. 728
Base Changing Wizard...................................................................................................... 732
21.
WARRANTY .............................................................................. 739
21.1
Terms of warranty ....................................................................................739
21.2
Range of warranty....................................................................................739
xxii

Honeywell
R200
11/09
1. Introduction
1.1
Features of SoftMaster
SoftMaster is a software tool designed to program and debug the MasterLogic 200 PLC
series. Following are some of the key features of SoftMaster.
Multi-PLC, Multi-Program
Edit, monitor and manage ML200 PLCs included in a project.
Enables multiple Scan programs and Task programs
Drag and Drop option
Shortcut Keys
R200
11/09
The default shortcut keys provided are customizable.
Message Windows
Easy and convenient editing with Drag and Drop function on most editors such
as Project, Variable/Comment, LD Edit, Variable Monitor, and so on.
Different message windows to edit and check programs.
Convenient Variable/Comment Editing
Option to edit using MS Excel
Edit option is available through View Variable, View Address, and View Flag.
Auto-fill function to fill similar Variables
Drag and Drop option on the Variable/Comment Windows.
Convenient Program Edit
Unlimited Undo/Redo function
Block Edit available in cell
Independent screen-level Edit
Enhanced Find/Replace function
Block Mask function to prohibit execution in rung.
Bookmark function for access to a specific location in a LD program.

Honeywell
25
1. Introduction
1.1. Features of SoftMaster
Monitoring Functions
Logging and reading data available if user defined conditions are met for a
specific address
Module Changing Wizard
26
Monitoring functions for variable monitoring, address monitoring, system

monitoring, trend monitoring, special module monitoring.
Custom Events
Allows reference to memory of selected address when editing LD
Easy and safe change of module during PLC RUN

Honeywell
R200
11/09
1. Introduction
1.2. System Requirements
1.2
System Requirements
The following are the system requirements of SoftMaster:
Item
Specification
Personal Computer and Memory
A Pentium computer and 128MB memory
COM Port
RS-232C serial port or USB port
Hard Disk
At least 100MB or more space.
Monitor
Monitor should have 1024 x 768 and higher

resolution.
Windows
Compatible with Windows 2000/XP.
ATTENTION
It is recommended to install SoftMaster on Windows 2000 or XP.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
27
1. Introduction
1.2. System Requirements
28

Honeywell
R200
11/09
2. Installation
2.1
SoftMaster Installation
Installing SoftMaster
To install SoftMaster, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Execute the installation file.
Installation Wizard prepares for installation as in the following illustration.

Honeywell
29
2. Installation
2.1. SoftMaster Installation
Step
3
Action
Enter your name and company name. Click Next.
You are prompted to specify the folder to install SoftMaster.

4
30
The default installation folder is displayed. If you want to change the folder,
click Browse to select a new folder. SoftMaster needs 30 MB of free disk
space. In case of inadequate free space, you are prompted to select a disk
with enough capacity.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
2. Installation
Step
Action
After selecting a folder, click Next.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
31
2. Installation
Step
5
Action
The installation progress is displayed as follows:
The installation may take a few minutes.
32

Honeywell
R200
11/09
2. Installation
Step
6
R200
11/09
Action
Click Finish to complete the installation.

Honeywell
33
2. Installation
2.2. USB Device Driver Installation
2.2
USB Device Driver Installation
Installing the USB Device driver

If you are installing SoftMaster on Windows 2000, the USB device driver is installed
automatically. However, in the case of Windows XP, you may need to install the USB
device driver separately.
TIP
If your OS is Windows 2000, SoftMaster is installed with USB device driver
automatically. However, in case of Window XP, the driver has to be
additionally installed.
To install USB Device drivers, perform the following steps:

ATTENTION
Ensure that a \Drivers sub-folder is created under the folder where
SoftMaster is installed, and there are 2 driver files- GmUSBD.sys and
GmUSBD.inf in the Drivers folder. If there is no folder or driver file, reinstall
SoftMaster.
34

Honeywell
R200
11/09
2. Installation
Step
1
Action
Turn PLC power ON and connect USB device to the PC.
If the connection is established, the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
is displayed.
Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) and click Next to
continue.
You are prompted to choose search and installation options.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
35
2. Installation
36
Step
Action
Select Search for the best driver in these locations and select Include
this location in the search.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
2. Installation
R200
11/09
Step
Action
Click Browse. On the Browse Folder dialog box, select Drivers folder where
SoftMaster is installed.

Honeywell
37
2. Installation
Step
6
38
Action
Click OK. Then, the computer starts searching for the driver files in the
selected folder.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
2. Installation
R200
11/09
Step
Action
If the computer found the most suitable device driver, you prompted to begin
installing the selected device driver. Since USB device driver operated stably
based on Windows OS, click Continue Anyway.

Honeywell
39
2. Installation
40
Step
Action
If the device driver has been installed completely, the Installation Complete
Dialog is displayed as follows. Click Finish to complete the installation of the
driver.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
2. Installation
Verifying the USB device driver installation

If USB connection is not available, check the installation status of the device driver as
follows:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the desktop, right-click on My Computer icon and select Manage from

the menu.
Computer Management dialog box is displayed as shown in the following

figure. On the left tree list of dialog box, click Computer Management
(Local)] > System Tools > Device Manager] in regular order. The items
displayed on the right list may be different according to devices installed on
the computer.

Honeywell
41
2. Installation
Normal Case
The USB device driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC has been installed successfully, if the
list Honeywell MasterLogic Series appears with the figure under Universal Serial Bus
Controller.
42

Honeywell
R200
11/09
2. Installation
Abnormal Case
The device driver has not been installed successfully, if the following figure is displayed.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
43
2. Installation
If the USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC is not installed successfully, reinstall the
USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC in the following steps.
Step
1
44
Action
On the device driver with the icon with an exclamation mark, right-click the
mouse and select Update Driver from the context menu.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
2. Installation
R200
11/09
Step
Action
H/W Update Wizard dialog box appears. Select the option Installation from a
list or specific location (Advanced) and click Next. The next sequence is
manually the same as in Installation of Device Driver.

Honeywell
45
2. Installation
If the USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC is not installed successfully, reinstall the
USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC in the following steps
Step
1
46
Action
If the device driver has been installed incorrectly or in error, execute H/W
Update Wizard. Select the option Installation from a list or specific location
(Advanced) and click Next.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
2. Installation
Step
2
R200
11/09
Action
On search and installation options, select Dont Search. I will choose the
driver to install and click Next.

Honeywell
47
2. Installation
Step
48
Action
Click Have Disk on the dialog box below.
If Installation dialog box is displayed on the disk, click Browse.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
2. Installation
R200
11/09
Step
Action
From the Browse File dialog box, move to the folder SoftMaster is installed in.
Select drivers folder to display GmUSBD.inf file. With this file selected, click
Open.
On the item of Copy manufacturers files from, a directory with the file of the
device driver is displayed. Click OK.

Honeywell
49
2. Installation
Step
7
50
Action
On Show compatible hardware list of the device driver Select dialog box,
select Honeywell MLSeries driver and then click Next.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
2. Installation
R200
11/09
Step
Action
Hardware Installation dialog box appears. Click Continue Anyway to go on

with the installation

Honeywell
51
2. Installation
52
Step
Action
Completing the Hardware Update dialog box appears. Click Finish to end the
installation of the driver.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
3. Basic Application
3.1
SoftMaster user interface
Understanding the SoftMaster user interface

The following is an illustration of the SoftMaster user interface. The user interface of
SoftMaster can be described as follows:
UI area
R200
11/09
Description
Menu bar: It is the basic menu bar of SoftMaster.
Tool bar: The toolbar below the menu bar contain buttons and
commands to access frequently used tasks.
Honeywell
53
3.1. SoftMaster user interface
UI area
Description
Project window: Displays the components of the currently open

project
Variable Monitoring window: Used to register and monitor

variables.
Status bar: Used to display the status of SoftMaster, the information

of the connected PLC, etc.
Edit window: Displays the current LD Edit window.
Message window: Displays messages when the SoftMaster is in

use.
Menu bar
Selecting a menu item displays the options under the menu. Click a menu item and select
an option from the drop-down list of menu options. You can also access the menu using
the shortcut keys.
54

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Project menu
The following is an illustration of the components of the Project menu.
The following table lists the Project menu options with their description:
Menu option
R200
11/09
Description
New Project
Creates a new project.
Open Project
Opens an existing project.
Open from PLC
Uploads the project and program stored

in PLC.
Save Project
Saves the project.
Save As
Allows you to save the project with a

different name.
Close Project
Closes the project.

Honeywell
55
Menu option
Add Item
Import Item from

File
56
Description
PLC
Adds a new PLC to the project.
Task
Adds a new task program to the project.
Program
Adds a new scan program to the project.
Function
Adds a new Function to the project.
Function Block
Adds a new Function Block to the project.
Data type
Adds a new Data type to the project.
PLC
Imports the PLC program from the file.
Global
Variables/Address
Imports Global Variables/Address from

the file.
Program
Imports the program from the file.
I/O parameter
Imports the I/O parameter from the file.
Basic parameter
Imports the basic parameter from the file.
Function/FB
Imports the Function/FB from the file/
Export to File
Exports the selected item on the project

window into the file.
Save Variable Names to File
Saves variable names to a file.
Compare Projects
Compares two projects stored in the PC

and displays its result.
Print
Prints the active windows details.
Preview
Displays a preview of the screen to be

printed.
Print Project
Enables selection of a project item for

printing.
Print Setup
Sets the printer options.
Exit
Ends SoftMaster.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Edit Menu
Menu option
R200
11/09
Description
Undo
Cancels the edit on Program Edit

Window to recover its previous status.
Redo
Recovers the edit cancelled using Undo.
Cut
Copies the selected block to clipboard

and deletes the block.
Copy
Copies the selected block to the

clipboard.
Paste
Copies from the clipboard and pastes on

the Edit Window.
Honeywell
57
Menu option
Delete
Deletes the selected block or items.
Select All
Selects all block of currently active

window.
Insert Mode
Changes program edit mode to insert

mode.
Insert Line
Adds a new line to the cursor position.
Delete Line
Deletes the line from the cursor position
Insert Cell
Adds a cell available to the cursor

position.
Delete Cell
Deletes a cell from the cursor position.
Register Special/Communication Module

Variables
Registers special module variables in

global variables list and deletes previous
list.
Optimize Program
Optimizes the program automatically.
Insert Comment/Label
Insert a comment or label in the cursor

position.
Set Block Mask
Sets cursor-positioned rung or specified

block area Block Mask in rung unit.
Remove Block Mask
Removes cursor-positioned rung or

specified block area set Block Mask.
Bookmark
Tools
58
Description
Set/Remove
Sets or removes a bookmark.
Remove All
Cancels all the bookmarks specified.
Previous Bookmark
Moves to the previous bookmark.
Next Bookmark
Moves to the next bookmark.

Edit Tools for each program are
available.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Find/Replace
Menu Option
Find Address
Find variable address
Find Text
Search for variable based on the variable

name
Replace Address
Replace variable address with another

address.
Replace Text
Replace variable name with some other

text
Find Again
Search again.
Go to
R200
11/09
Description
Step/line
Moves the cursor to the position of a

specific step/line.
Rung comment

specific rung comment.
Label

specific label.
END Command
Moves the cursor to the position of END

Command.
Previous Message
Moves from the message window to the

place the previous message indicates.
Next Message
Moves from the message window to the

place the next message indicates.
Honeywell
59
View
Menu
60
Description
IL
Converts to IL View during LD Edit.
Project Window
Shows or hides the project window.
Message Window
Shows or hides the message window.
Variable Monitoring Window
Shows or hides the variable monitor

window.
Instruction Window
Shows or hides the instruction window.
Cross Reference
Displays the used-memory information

on the message windows Cross
Honeywell
R200
11/09
Menu
Description
Reference tab.
R200
11/09
Used Address
Lists all the memory addresses which are

used in the program.
Check Program
Checks the program and displays its

result on the message windows Check
Program tab.
Variables
Displays the variable name in the

program.
Address
Indicates the Memory address.
Flags
Indicates default System defined flags.
Address/Variables
Displays the address and the variable in

the program.
Address/Comments
Displays the address and the comment in

the program.
Variables/Comments
Displays the variable and the comment in

the program.
Zoom-In
Magnifies the screen.
Zoom-Out
Reduces the screen.
Resize Width
Automatically adjusts the cell width to the

string width in the Variable/Comment
window.
Resize Height
Automatically adjusts the cell height

applicably to the string height in the LD or
Variable/Comment window.
Full Screen
Enlarge the program window or

Variable/Comment window applicably to
the whole screen.
Properties
Displays the registered information of the

selected item on the project window.
LD Properties
Displays the LD properties in the

program.
Change Columns
Increase or decrease the columns in the

program screen.
Honeywell
61
Menu
Description
Open Local Variables
Converts from the program screen to the

local variable screen.
Open User Function
Opens user defined program.
Open Program
Converts from the local variable screen

to the program screen.
Online
62

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Menu
Description
Connect/Disconnect
Connects or disconnects with PLC.
Connection Settings
Specifies the connection method.
Change Mode
Run
Changes PLC mode.
Stop
Debug
R200
11/09
Read
Reads parameter/program/comment from PLC.
Write
Writes parameter/program/comment on PLC.
Compare with PLC
Compares the project to the project saved in

PLC
Set Flash Memory
Copies the Program into PLC Flash memory if

enabled.
Reset PLC
Resets PLC.
Clear PLC
Deletes parameter/program/comment saved in

PLC.
PLC Information
Displays PLC information.
PLC History
Displays PLC history.
PLC Errors/Warnings
Displays PLC error/warning information.
I/O Information
PLC I/O Sync. And displays information
Save PLC History
Saves PLC History
Force I/O
Displays the window for compulsory I/O

setting.
Skip I/O
Displays the window for I/O skip setting.
Fault Mask
Displays the window for fault mask setting.
Module Changing Wizard
Displays the dialog window to change

modules.
Base Changing Wizard
Changes base while PLC is operating.
Start Online Editing
Displays the dialog box to edit the program

online when the PLC is running.
Honeywell
63
Menu
Description
Write Modified Program
Displays the dialog box to download the edited

program online when the PLC is running. The
modified program gets activated online.
End Online Editing
This ends the Online editing session and the

program comes back to normal operation
Monitor
Menu
64
Description
Start/Stop Monitoring
Starts or stops the monitor.
Pause
Temporarily stops the monitor.
Resume
Restarts the monitor temporarily stopped.
Pausing Conditions
Specifies conditions for the monitor

temporary stop.
Change Current Value
Specifies the address value being

monitored.
System Monitoring
Executes the system monitor.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Menu
Description
Address Monitoring
Execute the Address monitor window

which shows all memory area addresses.
Special Module Monitoring
Executes the special module monitor.
Trend Monitoring
Executes the trend monitor.
PID Monitoring
Monitors all or individual PID block.
SOE Monitoring
Monitors the events which are entered

into the CPU and event input modules.
Custom Events
Specifies the custom events.
Data Traces
Specifies the address to monitor the

change of the data.
Debug
Menu
R200
11/09
Description
Start/Stop Debugging
Converts to Debug mode to Start/Stop

Debugging.
Go
Runs to the break point.
Step Over
Runs step by step.
Step Into
Debugs the subroutine.

Honeywell
65
Menu
Description
Step Out
Escapes from the subroutine.
Go to Cursor
Runs to the cursor position.
Set/Remove Breakpoints
Sets or cancels the break point.
Breakpoints List
Displays the list of the break points

specified.
Breakpoint Conditions
Specifies the break conditions
Tools
Menu
66
Description
Network Manager
Shows the PLC network and specifies

the parameter.
Start/End Simulator
Starts or ends the simulator.
Customize
User defines tools and instructions.
Shortcut Settings
User specifies the Shortcut Keys.
Options
Changeable applicably to SoftMaster

environment by user.
Create Host ID
This creates the host ID file. Host ID is

required to get the license.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Window
Menu
Description
New Window
Opens a new window on the active

window.
Split
Splits the Project window.
Cascade
Arranges the several windows of

SoftMaster in steps.
Tile Horizontally

SoftMaster horizontally
Tile Vertically

SoftMaster vertically
Arrange Icons
Arranges the icons of SoftMaster.
Close All
Closes all the windows of SoftMaster.
Help
Instruction
R200
11/09
Description
SoftMaster Help
Opens Help for SoftMaster application.
Instruction Help
Opens Help for PLC instructions.
About SoftMaster
Displays SoftMaster information.

Honeywell
67
Tool Bar
SoftMaster provides shortcut icons for frequently used menus on the tool bar. Click a tool
to execute.
Creating a custom tool bar

To create a custom Tool Bar, perform the following steps:
Step
1
Action
On the menu, select Tools > Customize.
The Customize dialog box is displayed.
68

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Step
Action
Select the tool bars to show/hide.

2
Click New.
The New Tool bar dialog box is displayed.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
69
Step
Action
Enter a name for the new tool bar.
Click OK to create a tool bar with no tools.
Filling the Tool Box

This menu is used to populate the tool box created with custom tools. To fill the tool box,
perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select the Command tab on the customize dialog box.
Select the menus that you want as a part of the new tool bar.
Click OK to create the new tool bar.
Status Display Line

As depicted in the following illustration, the Status Display line is used to display the
following:
70
Legend
Description
Tool tip of
selected toolbar
item
Used to display the comment of the selected menu, instruction or

mouse-positioned tool box.
Name of the
PLC
Indicates the name of the selected PLC name. If a project has

several PLCs, online-related instructions are applied to the PLC
displayed here. (Example: New PLC)
PLC Mode
display
Used to display the PLC mode. If several PLCs are in a project,

the selected PLCs mode is displayed. (Example: Run)
Warning Display
Indicates the error status in the PLC. (Example: R1, Ethernet,

OK)
Honeywell
R200
11/09
Legend
Description
Cursor Position
Indicates the cursor position when a program is edited.

(Example: Row 9, Column 5)
Mode
Indicates the insert mode or overwrite mode.
Change View Window

All the windows (such as project window, result window, etc.) available in View menu
are composed of docking-available windows. Use the mouse to adjust the position and
the size of the windows or to hide the windows.
Move Position with the left mouse button pressed, drag the mark
to another
position. The following figure shows the project window moved downward.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
71
72

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Change to Open Window

Right-click the mouse on a window and choose Float In Main Window from the context
menu.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
73
Hide
Select Hide from the right-click context menu on the window.
74

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Application of dialog box

A dialog box in which you can enter or specify the required value.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
75
Field Label
76
Description
Input
Used to enter a specific string using keys.
List Box
Used to select an item on the list. Press the list box arrow
to display the list with the item to click and select.
Options
Used to select just one item in the same group. Use the
mouse to select the specific item.
OK
If OK is clicked, the specified value is input.
Cancel
If Cancel is clicked, the specified value is not to be input

but the previous status is kept.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
3.2. Open/Close Project
3.2
Open/Close Project
Open Project
To open the project, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the menu, select Project > Open Project
Select Project File and then click Open.
TIP
The extension of SoftMaster project file is .xgp. On the Open dialog box,
select Project File to check the project comment in the comment area.
Close Project
To close the project, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Project > Close Project on the menu.
If the project is not saved after editing, the following message appears.
Click Yes to save.

Honeywell
77
3.2. Open/Close Project
Save Project
To save the project, perform the following:
On the menu, select Project > Save Project.

TIP
The mark * displayed to the right of the project name on the project window
indicates that the current project has been edited.
78

Honeywell
R200
11/09
3.3. Edit Functions
3.3
Edit Functions
These functions are available in LD, IL, Variable/Comment, Variable Monitor and
Project Window. Variable/Comment and Excel can share the edited details with each
other.
Cut-Paste
It is used for selecting blocks to move to other places.
R200
11/09
Cut > Paste menu is used to move the data of the selected area to a new position to
paste the data on. The example of Cut > Paste on the Variable/Comment Window
is as follows.

Honeywell
79
3.3. Edit Functions
Copy Paste
Copy > Paste menu is used to create data identical to the data of the selected area. At this
time, in case the variable name is duplicated as described in Variable/Comment, an
applicable warning message appears. Refer to the comment of each edit window for more
details. The example of Copy > Paste in LD figure is as follows.
Drag and Drop
Drag & Drop is used to apply either Cut > Paste or Copy > Paste. When dragging and
dropping in a same area such as same LD or IL window, it applies Cut > Paste; if
dragging and dropping with two and more SoftMaster Program instances opened, it
applies Copy > Paste.
80

Honeywell
R200
11/09
3.4. Shortcut Keys
TIP
3.4
Cut, Copy and Paste can be also controlled by the mouse context menu in
Edit window.
Copy/Paste in Variable/Comment or LD/IL Edit is verified for the duplication

by the program. However, it should be also checked manually by a user.
Program does not respond if Cut, Copy or Paste is operated in an

unavailable area.
Cut, Copy or Paste from/to different areas may cause fatal program errors.
Auto conversion function is not provided when Cut, Copy or Paste is

attempted from/to different areas. Therefore, a user should check the
pasted area.
Shortcut Keys
Configuring shortcut keys

Shortcut Keys can be specified for all the instructions. When you set new shortcut keys
for a task the existing shortcut is deleted.
To set the shortcut key for an instruction, perform the following:
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
On the menu, select Tools > Shortcut Settings.

Honeywell
81
3.4. Shortcut Keys
Step
Action
Field Label
82
Description
Select a macro
Used to select the menu to specify its

shortcut key on the list.
Create Shortcut
Used to create a shortcut key for the selected

menu.
Remove
Deletes the specified shortcut key.
Reset All
Deletes all the shortcut keys specified and

resets all to default.
From the Select a macro list, select the menu to specify its shortcut key.
Click Create Shortcut.
Click the shortcut key to set. For example, to apply Alt + Z, press Alt and Z on
the keyboard. A shortcut key is displayed on the Edit Window. If this key
association is already used, a menu applicable to the specified shortcut key is
displayed.
Click OK to save the shortcut.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
3.5. Edit Window Zoom In, Zoom Out
3.5
Edit Window Zoom In, Zoom Out
Zooming in/Zooming out

This function is used for magnifying or reducing the Edit Window. The applicable
magnification rate changes by a minimum of 5% within the range of 50% ~ 200%.
To zoom in/zoom out the edit window, perform the following steps:
R200
11/09
Select View > Zoom In or View > Zoom Out on the menu as necessary. Or use the
combo box to select or enter a specific magnification rate. Or together with Ctrl
being pressed, use the mouse wheel to adjust the rate. The two figures below show
the examples of 50% and 200% magnified screens.

Honeywell
83
3.6. Customizing SoftMaster
3.6
Customizing SoftMaster
This function allows you to configure the default folder for storing projects, set the
common editor, and configures the font/color for LD, SFC and ST.
84
1.
Category: Used for classifying the SoftMaster option applied to entire program and
option applied to language like tree.
2.
Setting contents: If you select [a]s category, it displays contents of each category.
3.
Entire button: Affects the entire category regardless of selected category. Reset
category button is used to reset all value of option.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Configuring SoftMaster options

To configure custom options for SoftMaster, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the menu, select Tools > Options.
Select SoftMaster in the Option dialog box.

Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Default folder for new

projects
Used to select location where to make

new project.
Select Folder
Searches the directory.
Number of backup file(s)
Sets the backup file number to restore

project file. You can set up to max. 20.
Number of recent projects to

display
Displays a list no. of the recently opened

project file in the Menu Project > Recent
Project
You can set up to max. 20
Open previous project when

starting the SoftMaster.
If you check it, SoftMaster opens the last

file used automatically when SoftMaster
starts.
Integrated connection and
When executing SoftMaster-NM through

Honeywell
85
Step
Action
file with SoftMaster-NM
SoftMaster menu, make connection option

of SoftMaster and PLC name displayed at
SoftMaster-NM identically.
Click OK.
Setting Common Editor

To display the Common editor, perform the following steps:
Step
86
Action
Select Common Editor and select items you want to change.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Step
Action
The following table provides a brief description of Common Editor Settings.
Field Label
Description
Output cross
reference instantly
When editing the LD program, displays Cross

reference contents automatically about
selected address. When not checking this
option, selects [View]-[Cross Reference] on the
menu and checks memory usage result.
Check duplicated coil

instantly
Checks the duplicated coils during editing and

displays it in the result window.
Instant input mode
When user enters some contact, displays the

address input window for user to enter the
address. When this is not checked, user
double-clicks the contact or presses Enter with
cursor on the contact to edit it
Show line numbers
Displays line number.
Show grid
Displays grid
SoftMaster font/color option

It is available to change font/color used in the editing window. You can also set the font
color for LD, SFC and ST.
To change the font/color, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Font/Color and select items you want to change.

Honeywell
87
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Items
Selects the items that you want to change

font/color.
Font
It is activated when item is Text font. It

designates text font.
Color
It is activated when item is not Text font. It

designates color.
Default
Restore to default value.
Preview
Displays the current setting status.
SoftMaster online option

SoftMaster Online-related options can be specified.
To specify the online-related options, perform the following steps:
Step
1
88
Action

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Step
2
Action
Select Online in the category.
Type: Sets monitor display type of data value.

Example: It you select hexadecimal, variable is displayed as hexadecimal
number when monitoring.
Type
Ex) function block ADD
Unsigned
decimal
R200
11/09

Honeywell
89
Step
Action
Signed
decimal
Hexadecimal
As instruction
As variable
View connection settings when connecting: Used to display the specified

details of the connection with PLC automatically when connected. If the
option View connection settings when connecting is selected, the following
dialog box appears whenever PLC is connected with.
90

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Step
Action
Show Message when changing the PLC mode: When changing the PLC,
selects to display conversion message automatically. When changing stop
mode to run mode, the following message displays.
Contrary, when changing run mode to stop mode, the following message
displays.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
91
Configuring LD option
You can change text and column width of LD editor.
To display the LD option, perform the following steps.
Step
Action
Select LD from the Options dialog box.
92
Field Label
Description
Display above text
When displaying text above diagram,

decides whether to display height of text
as variable type according to the number
of character or as fixed type according to
setting.
Display below text
When displaying text below diagram,

decides whether to display height of text
as variable type according to the number
of character or as fixed type according to
setting.
Display
Specified column width of LD diagram.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
LD Font/Color option
You can change Font/Color used in LD editor.
To set the LD font/color option, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Font/Color in LD category and select items you want to change.
R200
11/09
Field Label
Description
Items
Used to select the area to specify its font

or color.
Font
Activated when item is Variable/Comment,

specifies font of Variable/Comment.
Color
Activated when item is not

Variable/Comment, specifies color.
Default
For selected item, restore default value.
Preview
Displays the setting value of the selected

item.

Honeywell
93
Configuring SFC option

Options used when editing SFC program.
To display the SFC option, perform the following steps.
Step
1
Select SFC from the Options dialog box.
94
Action
Field Label
Description
Show comment
Shows comment of step, transition, action

and block.
Show print area
Shows print-able area with the thick

dotted line.
Show page number
Shows page number in print-able area
Step column width
Specifies column width of step, transition.
Action column width
Specifies column width of action.
Utilize SFC split window
You can use SFC split window.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Step
Action
Split window position
Decides split widow position.
Split window contents
Decides which content to display.
ATTENTION
Range of step column width is 20~200.
Range of action column width is 70~400.
SFC Font/Color option

You can change Font/Color used in SFC editor.
To set the SFC font/color option, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Font/Color in SFC category and select items you want to change.

Honeywell
95
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Items

or color.
Font

Color

Default
Preview

item.
Configuring ST option
Options used in editing ST program.
To display the ST option, perform the following steps.
Step
96
Action
Select ST from the Options dialog box.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Field Label
Description
Parameter information
Exclusive of 2MLK CPU.
Auto list members
When entering character with keyboard,

shows instruction and variable starting
with inputted character.
Auto macro statement
When entering control statement such as

IF, WHILE, SWITCH and pressing Enter
key, complete the statement according to
ST grammar.
Tab size
Specifies space size when pressing Tab

key.
Auto indent
When changing line with Enter key,

indented automatically as many as
previous tab size.
Enhance
Shows character string with diverse color

according to variable, reserved word,
comment and instruction.

Honeywell
97
ST Font/Color option
You can change Font/Color used in ST editor.
To set the ST font/color option, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Font/Color in ST category and select items you want to change.
98
Field Label
Description
Items

or color.
Font

Color

Default
Preview

item.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
4. Project Configuration
4.1
Overview of Project Configuration
Project configuration window

The components of the project configuration window are as follows.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
99
4.1. Overview of Project Configuration
Legend
Item Name
Description
Project
Used to specify the whole system. Several

PLCs related can be included in one project.
PLC
Displays the system applicable to a CPU

module.
Global/Direct Variables
Global variable declaration and direct variable

text can be edited and viewed.
Parameter
Used to specify the details on operation and

configuration of PLC system.
Basic Parameters
Used to specify the basic operation.
I/O Parameters
Used to specify the I/O module configuration.
User Data type
Defines a structure type.
Scan Program
Used as the folder for all the programs.
New program
Folder for Local Variables and user written

scan programs.
Scan Program 2

scan programs.
Task1
User defined task with a fixed cycle.
Task Program1

Task programs.
User function/function
block
Custom function/function block created by the

user.
Function1

functions.
TIP
A project can include several PLCs. This way, SoftMaster can be used to
conveniently manage and monitor several PLCs simultaneously.
100

Honeywell
R200
11/09
4.2. Project Management
4.2
Project Management
Creating a new project

It is used to create a new project. A folder with a name identical to the project name is
created and the project file is saved in this folder.
Step
1
Action
On the menu, select Project > New Project.
The following dialog box is displayed
R200
11/09

Honeywell
101
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Project name
Used to enter the project name, which is the

name of the project file. The extension of the
project file is .xgp.
File directory
A folder whose name is identical to the project

name as specified by the user is created and
the project file is stored in this folder.
Select Folder
Browse to select a folder to store the project

file.
PLC series
Select ML-200, ML-50, ML-200 IEC or ML-200R

as the PLC type.
CPU type
Select the type of CPU
Program name
Enter the name of a program included in a

project.
Program language
Select the program language as LD, SFC or ST.
Project description
Enter a description for the project.
TIP
When you create a new project, it is stored in a folder with a name that is
identical to the project name. The extension of .xgp is automatically
attached to the project file if it is not specified.
Opening the Project

To open an existing project, perform the following steps:
Step
1
Action
Select Project > Open Project from the menu bar.
The following dialog box is displayed.
102

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Step
Action
Select a Project and click Open.

Note: When you select a project, the user defined comment appears in the
comment section of the dialog box. This helps in selecting projects.
Opening a project from PLC

It is used to read the project stored in PLC, to make a new project. If the project is
already open in SoftMaster, this project is closed to create a new project.
To create a new project, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the menu, select Project > Open from PLC.
Select an object to connect, on the Online Settings and click OK.

Refer to Connect Options in On-line for details on connection settings.
3
R200
11/09
A new project is created.

Honeywell
103
TIP
Select Project > Save Project to save the project read from the PLC in
the PC.
Select Online > Read to read the items of PLC and import to the
currently open Project.
Saving a Project
It is used to save changes in a project.
To save a Project, on the menu bar, select Project > Save Project.
TIP
If items in the project have changed and need to be saved, * is displayed
beside the project name in the project window.
Saving Project as
It is used to save the project as a different file name.
To save the project, with a different file name:
104

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Step
Action
On the menu, select Project > Save As.
Enter a new project file name and select a folder, where you want to save the
project file
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
File name
Used to enter the name of the project. The project

file is stored with that name. The extension of the
project file is .xgp
File directory
The last saved file path is displayed for saving the

current file. In case of a first-time save, the default
folder name displayed is identical to the name of
the project.
Select Folder
Browse to select a folder to store the project file.
Click OK.

Honeywell
105
4.3. Project Item
4.3
Project Item
Add item
PLC, task and program can be added into the project.
Perform the following procedure to Add PLC.
Step
106
Action
On the project window, select the Project Item.
On the menu, select Project > Add Item >PLC.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
4.3. Project Item
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Enter the PLC name, PLC type, and PLC description, and then click OK, to
create a new PLC, as displayed in the following figure.

Honeywell
107
4.3. Project Item
Step
Action
TIP
SoftMaster allows the user to specify the project and include several PLCs in
one project for convenient program management.
Add Task
REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information on the operation and details of the task, see 2MLK
CPU manual.
108

Honeywell
R200
11/09
4.3. Project Item
To add a task, perform the following steps:

Step
R200
11/09
Action
In the project window, select the PLC Item.
On the menu, select Project > Add Item > Task.
Enter the Task name, Priority, Task Number and Execution Condition, and
then click OK, to create a new Task, as displayed in the following figure.

Honeywell
109
4.3. Project Item
Step
Action
Field Label
110
Description
Task name
Enter the name of the task. The name

must not include special characters.
Priority
Used to specify the priority of the tasks.

A lower figure indicates a higher priority.
Lower the figure, higher is the priority.
Task number
It is a unique number used to identify

and manage the tasks in PLC. The Task
number can change based on the
Honeywell
R200
11/09
4.3. Project Item
Step
Action
Execution condition. ( Ex. Fixed Cycle: 0
~ 31)
Execution condition
Used to specify the execution condition

under which the task is executed.
Internal address execution

condition
Setting items are different according to

the type of internal address.
Address
Used to enter the address which is used

as the start condition of task program.
Enter BIT or WORD address according
to the condition to execute task program.
Word address start condition
The start condition is specified if WORD

type of the internal address start
condition is selected.
Bit address start condition
The start condition is specified if BIT type

of the internal address start condition is
selected.
TIP
Execution condition may be different according to the PLC type.
Initialization: The initialization task is executed when the PLC mode

is changed from STOP to RUN. It is executed until the _INIT_DONE
(F10250) Flag is ON. And while the initialization task is executed, the
programs (including the Scan Program) which belong to other tasks
is not executed.
Fixed Cycle: The task is executed at the specified intervals of time.

Enter the time in ms unit.
External contact point: The task is executed if specified external

contact point is ON. The relative external address should be entered.
Example) %P00016
R200
11/09
Internal address: The task is executed based on the status of

internal address. The setup item is different according to the type of
internal address.

Honeywell
111
4.3. Project Item
Adding a Program
To add a Program, perform the following steps:
Step
112
Action
In the project window, select the Program Location to add.

The program can be added to Scan Program or Task Item.
On the menu, select Project > Add Item > Program.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
4.3. Project Item
R200
11/09
Step
Action
Enter the Program name, language, and Program Description, and then click
OK.

Honeywell
113
4.3. Project Item
Exporting to file
The following items can be saved as separate item files.
Item
File Extension
PLC
plc
Global/direct variables
gdv
I/O parameter
iop
Basic parameter
bsp
Program
prg
Use function/function block
fun
Exporting PLC Configuration

To export a PLC, perform the following steps:
Step
114
Action
On the project window, select the PLC.
On the menu, select Project > Export to File > PLC.
Enter the file name and then click OK.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
4.3. Project Item
Exporting Variable/Comment
To export a Variable/Comment, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
In the project window, select the Variable/Comment Item.
On the menu, select Project > Export to File > Variable/Comment.
Enter the file name, and then click OK.
Exporting I/O Parameters

To export I/O Parameters, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
In the project window, select the I/O Parameter Item.
On the menu, select Project > Export to File > I/O Parameter.
Exporting Basic Parameters

To export basic parameters, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
In the project window, select the Basic Parameter Item.
On the menu, select Project > Export to File > Basic Parameter.
Exporting a Program
To export a Program, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
In the project window, select the Program Item.
On the menu, select Project > Export to File > Program.

Honeywell
115
4.3. Project Item
Step
3
Action
TIP
Items can be easily copied or moved between the projects using the
Drag and Drop function.
Drag and drop function is available between projects, when two

SoftMaster projects are open.
Importing from file

The following components can be saved as separate files and replaced by saved files.
Item
File extension
PLC
plc
Global/direct variables
gdv
I/O parameter
iop
Basic parameter
bsp
Program
prg
User function/function block
fun
Imports item from saved item files. The contents from PLC, program is inserted into
project. Variable/comment, basic parameter, I/O parameter, etc. is overwritten on the
previous item.
TIP
Since Variable/Comment, Basic Parameters and I/O Parameters are
overwritten on the existing items; the content of the existing item is deleted.
116

Honeywell
R200
11/09
4.3. Project Item
Importing a PLC CPU Configuration

To import a PLC CPU configuration, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
In the project window, select the Project Item.
On the menu, select Project > Import Item from File > PLC.
Select the file, and then click OK.
Importing Variable/Comment
To import Variable/Comment, perform the following steps:
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action

Honeywell
117
4.3. Project Item
Step
118
Action
On the menu, select Project > Import Item from File > Global
Variables/Address.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
4.3. Project Item
Importing I/O Parameter

To import an I/O Parameter, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the project window, select the PLC Item.
On the menu, select Project > Import Item from File > I/O Parameter.
Select the file, and click OK.

Honeywell
119
4.3. Project Item
Importing Basic Parameter

To import basic Parameter, perform the following steps:
Step
120
Action
In the menu, select Project > Import Item from File > Basic Parameter.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
4.3. Project Item
Importing a Program
To import a Program, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
In the project window, select the Program Location to add.

The program can be added to Scan Program or Task Item.
On the menu, select Project > Import Item from File > Program.
Project properties
To view the project properties, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the project window, select the Project Item.
On the menu, select View > Properties.

Honeywell
121
4.3. Project Item
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Project name
Displays the project name, which

can be changed as necessary.
Project description
Displays the project description,

which can be changed as
necessary.
File Name
Displays the file name where the

project is saved.
To save as a different file:
Select Project > Save As.
122
After the change, click OK.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
4.3. Project Item
Viewing/editing changing PLC Properties

To view the properties of a PLC, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the project window, select the PLC.
Viewing/editing task Properties

To view task properties, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the project window, select a Task.
Viewing/editing Program information

To view Program properties, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the project window, select a Program.
Changing program execution sequence

Scan and Task program is executed from the priority in regular sequence.
Thus, the program location is changed to alter the execution sequence.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
123
4.3. Project Item
Changing the order of execution

To change the order of execution, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select a program.
Right-click on the program and select Move Up (Program) or Move Down

(Program) from the context menu.
Changing the execution sequence using Drag and Drop

To change the execution sequence using drag and drop technique, perform the following
steps:
Step
124
Action
Select a program.
Click the mouse to drag to a specific location.
Drop on a specific location.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
4.3. Project Item
Comparing Projects
Two projects can be compared with respect to specific items. Compare result is displayed
in the Result window.
To compare two projects, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the menu, select Project > Compare Projects.
In the Compare Projects window, click Open Project.
Select the project files to compare.
Select the items to compare with. The selected items of both projects should
be identical.

Honeywell
125
4.3. Project Item
Step
126
Action
Click Compare.
Compare results are displayed in the Result window.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
4.4. Project Password
4.4
Project Password
Setting Project password

You can specify the password for a project file. This function prevents other users from
opening the project file. This project file password bears no relation with the PLC
password. Password can have a maximum of 8 characters
ATTENTION
You will not be able to open the project file if you forget the password.
Input password
To set a password for a project, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the project window, select the Project Items.

Honeywell
127
Step
128
Action
In the project dialog box, select the Password tab.
Enter the password in the Password box in the New password section.
Re-enter the password in Confirm password.
Click OK.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Changing password
To change password, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
In the project window, select the Project Item.
In the Project dialog box, select the Password tab.

Honeywell
129
130
Step
Action
Enter the previous password in Password box, under Previous password.
Enter the new password in Password box, under New password.
Enter the new password once again in Confirm password, identical to the
previous password.
Click OK.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Deleting Password
To delete password, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the project window, select the Project.
In the Project dialog box, select the Password tab.

Honeywell
131
Step
132
Action
Enter the password in Password box.
Click Delete.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
5.1
Overview of variables
Use of variables is program dependent. In general, global variable is available in every
program. To use a global variable as a local variable, it is necessary to declare it as
EXTERN before use. Local variable is available only in a designated program. Direct
variable (variables with user specified address) can be used in the program. In addition, a
comment can be entered to the direct variable.
5.2
Global/Direct Variable
Global/Direct variables consist of global variables, direct variable comments and flags. A
Global variable declare the variable to be used for a program or displays a list of the
declared variables, based on the available variables. Direct variable comment declares the
direct variable comment available in a program or displays the comment. The Flag
displays a list of flags provided by the declaration. The following are the different types
of flags:
System flag
High Speed link flag
P2P flag
PID flag.
Global Variable
Global variables are declared and the list is displayed.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
133
5. Variables
5.2. Global/Direct Variable
Comment of a Direct Variable

It displays the comment of a direct variable entered or declared for the variables.
a)
134
Direct variable: if entering a variable, it displays the data of the direct

variable comment.
Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
TIP
Direct variable varies depending on CPU type.
Flag
The following table provides a description of the dialog box.

Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Flag kind
Used to select the type of flag (System, HS link, P2P and PID)
All
Used to display the entire list of flags selected from Flag kind. In case of system
flag, all the details are displayed on the screen. If All is not selected, only the flag
applicable to the Parameter number and Block index is displayed.
Parameter
number
This is active only for High-speed link, P2P and PID flag. Only the flag item of the
input parameter number is displayed. (Example, If Parameter Number 1 is
entered; the flag number is displayed as in the following figure.)

Honeywell
135
5. Variables
136
Field Label
Description
Block index
This is active only for High Speed link and P2P flag. Only the flag item of the input
block index is displayed. (Example, If Block index 120 is entered; it is as in the
following figure.)

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit
5.3
Global/Direct Variable Edit

It is possible to edit the variable kind, variable name, memory address, initial value,
retain, used status and comment of a variable currently declared as a global/direct
variable. In addition, a new global variable can be added to the list of the global/direct
variables.
Global/Direct Variable Registration

Register the global/direct variables to use it in a program. In order to register on the list
of global/direct variables, go through Global Variable.
Register as Global Variable
A variable can be added to the list of global variables, modified or deleted from it.
Field Label
Description
Variable kind
VAR_GLOBAL and VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT are available.
Variable name
The declared variable cannot be duplicated.

A number is not allowed as the first character.
A special character is not allowed. (However, _ is available.)
Space is not allowed as a character.
A direct variable with the same name is not allowed (i.e. MX0,
WB0,)
If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering
R200
11/09

Honeywell
137
5. Variables
Field Label
Description
a variable.
23 types of variables are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types.
Type
Basic type(20):
(BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD,

SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT,
UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME,
DATE, TIME_OF_DAY,
DATE_AND_TIME, STRING)
Derived type(3):
ARRAY(i.e. ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF
BOOL) => limit (up to 3rd), STRUCT(i.e.
STRUCT name display) => STRUCT type
is not available in STRUCT, FB_INST(i.e.
FB name display)
Memory address
Indicates the memory address that be entered using the direct variable
(I, Q, M, R, W).
Initial value
Indicates the default value that can be set.
Retain
Indicates if memory address is set, retain column is inactive.

R, W:
Always retain area.
M:
Setting as per basic parameter information.
I, Q:
Always not retain area.
Used
Indicates whether to use a declared variable.
Comment
Allows entry of a comment. Use Ctrl + Enter key to enter Multi line
comments.
Line validity
To register on global variable window, it needs variable kind, variable

name and variable type.
An incomplete entry in a global variable window is highlighted in pink.
TIP
An error that occurs when editing a cell, is highlighted in pink. Press ESC key
to recover the previous value during the cell edit.
138

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste

Copy, cut, delete or paste can be executed to edit the list of global/direct variables used in
the program.
Copy
It is used to save the data of a selected area in the clipboard. The copied details can be
pasted to the current project or other projects. You can also paste in other applications.
To copy the data to the windows clipboard, perform eth following steps:
Step
Action
Select the area to copy.
On the menu, select Edit > Copy.
TIP
To select the area,
Use the mouse to select the cell of (0,0) in order to select the whole
table
Select Edit > Select All in order to select the whole table.
Use the mouse to select the column header of the cell in order to
select the whole columns.
Use the mouse to select the row header of the cell in order to select
the whole rows.
Use the mouse to drag the part of the cell in order to select the area.
Use Shift + Arrow keys on the keyboard in order to select the area
Delete
It is used to delete the data of a selected area from the list of global/direct variables.
To delete data of a selected area, perform the following steps:
R200
11/09

Honeywell
139
5. Variables
Step
Action
Select the area to delete.
On the menu, select Edit > Delete.
Cut
It is used to save the selected data in the clipboard in order to add to the current project or
other projects. Unlike Copy, Cut deletes the selected data from the original area.
To cut the data and save it in windows clipboard, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select the area to cut.
On the menu, select Edit > Cut.
Paste
This option enables the pasting of cut or copied data (saved on the clipboard) in the
selected position. If the data is already displayed, the dialog box is called to select and
change the data.
If the data saved in the clipboard is a part of columns,
To paste the data to a specified location:

Step
140
Action
Select the position to paste on.
On the menu, select Edit > Paste.
If the variable and direct variable are identical on the list of

variables/comments, the following dialog box is displayed.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
R200
11/09
a)
Number: used to display the duplicated number of the variables and direct
variables to paste
b)
Replace: used to apply Paste.
c)
Gray Line: used to display the existing list of variables/comments, which is

not edited.
d)
White Line: used to display the list of variables/comments obtained from the
clipboard, which is not edited.
e)
OK: applies the lines selected. The existing list of variables/comments is

deleted to add a new list of variables/comments.
Honeywell
141
5. Variables
f)
Cancel: The existing list of variables/comments is not deleted, and a new the
list of variables/ comments is not applied accordingly.
g)
Select All: used to select all in the Replace column.
h)
Unselect All: used to cancel all the selections in the Replace column.
If the data saved in the clipboard is of the partial column,
To paste the data to a specified location:

Step
142
Action
Select the position to paste.
On the menu, select Edit >Paste.
If the variable and direct variable are identical on the list of

variables/comments, the following dialog box is displayed.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
R200
11/09
a)
Number: Used to display the duplicated number of the variables and direct
variables to paste
b)
Replace: Used to apply Paste.
c)
Gray Line: Used to display the data in the existing cell, which is not edited.
d)
White Line: If the variable or address of the data to paste is duplicated, it is

automatically increased and then displayed on the screen. In addition, the cell
can be edited.
e)
Select All: Used to select all in the Replace column.
f)
Unselect All: Used to cancel all the selections in the Replace column.
Honeywell
143
5. Variables
TIP
If all items are identical, the cell cannot be edited, while if partially
identical, the cell can be edited.
If the number of the columns saved in the clipboard is greater than

the number of the columns to paste, it is not possible to paste.
If the data saved in the clipboard is greater than the number of the lines
to paste, it is not possible to paste.
Paste in View Direct Variable Comment regards the data saved in the
clipboard as the partial columns.
Paste is not available in Flag but in other Excel program.
Changing variable name

To change the variable name, perform the following steps:
Step
1
144
Action
In the Project window, double-click Global Variables/Address.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Step
Action
The list of all global variables in listed.
R200
11/09
Click the header of the Serial Number column to select the entire list of
variables as illustrated.
On the menu, click Edit>Cut or right-click and choose Cut from the menu.
Paste the variables into an Excel sheet.

Honeywell
145
5. Variables
Step
Action
Make necessary changes to the variable names.
Right click on the header of the Serial Number column and choose Paste.
ATTENTION
Do not re-register the special modules.
Insert line
It is used to insert new lines in the selected area. Inserting a line pushes down the existing
lines.
To insert new lines, perform the following steps:
Step
146
Action
Select a line before which you want to insert a line.
On the menu, select Edit > Insert Line.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Step
Action
A line is inserted above the selected line.
TIP
If no cell is selected, one line is added to the first line.
Press Enter or Tab to create a new line at the end of the last line.
It is available only in the Global Variable page.
Delete line
It is used to delete the lines in a selected area. To delete existing lines, perform the
following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select a line.
On the menu, select Edit > Delete Line.

Honeywell
147
5. Variables
Step
Action
The line is deleted
ATTENTION
Delete Line is not executed If no cell is selected.
Automatic fill
It is used to add variables to the existing list of variables/comments.
To use automatic fill option, perform the following steps:
Step
148
Action
Move the mouse to the end of the cell and the mouse cursor changes to +
shape.
Move the mouse upward and downward, keeping the left mouse button
pressed.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
R200
11/09

Honeywell
149
5. Variables
a)
Variable kind: the value is filled in a cell as copied.
b)
Variable Name: it always does Automatic Fill because a duplicate variable

cannot be declared. If it contains a number, it automatically increases. If not, it
adds a number at the end and counts it automatically.
c)
Type: it is filled in a cell as copied.
d)
Memory address: it always executes Automatic Fill because address cannot

be declared in duplicate. If it contains a number, it searches for the part and
increases it automatically.
e)
Initial value: it is filled in a cell as copied.
f)
Retain: it is checked as copied.
g)
Used: it cannot be modified because of Read Only.
h)
Comment: If Automatic Fill is done with the Ctrl key pressed, the figure area
automatically increases, and with the Ctrl key not pressed, it is copied.
ATTENTION
150
If Automatic Fill is executed with an empty cell, the contents of

subsequent cells are cleared.
This function is available only for variable name and comments.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Drag & Drop

It is used to drag selected items and paste in a different position. To drag and drop the
selected items, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the area to drag and drop.
The mouse cursor changes to the state available for drag and drop.
Keep the left mouse button pressed and drag and drop the selected items in
a position to paste it.

Honeywell
151
5. Variables
Drag and drop is available on the Variable Monitoring Window, LD Window, Data
Traces window, Global Variable window of other SoftMaster programs and Direct
Variable Comment window of other SoftMaster programs.
Copy is available when drag and drop is executed in the Excel program.
152

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
ATTENTION
Data does not move but is copied when dragged and dropped
Paste is not available in Flag.
Undo/Redo
Undo is used to undo or cancel the last edited detail in order to return to its previous
state. Click Redo to cancel the Undo action.
Undo/Redo is available in the following cases:
1.
Undo/Redo is available for Cell Edit.
2.
Undo/Redo is available for Change.
3.
Undo/Redo is available for Delete.
4.
Undo/Redo is available for Cut.
5.
Undo/Redo is available for Paste.
6.
Undo/Redo is available for Automatic Fill.
7.
Undo/Redo is available for Insert Line. (Only in Global Variable)
8.
Undo/Redo is available for Delete Line. (Only in Global Variable)
9.
Undo/Redo is available for drag and drop.
10. Undo/Redo is available for Align. (Only in Global Variable)

ATTENTION
R200
11/09
In Global Variable, if the data is moved to other windows or a variable

is added in LD and IL, all the information for Undo/Redo disappears.
In Direct Variable Comment, if the direct variable item changes, all

the information for Undo/Redo disappears.
The Undo/redo function cannot be used in Flag.

Honeywell
153
5. Variables
Export to file
It is used to save the previously declared list of global variables in a file that can be
subsequently opened and read from external programs.
To export a file, perform the following steps:
On the menu, select Edit > Export to File.

ATTENTION
This function is available only for Global Variables.
Registering Special Module Variables

The Registering Special Module Variables function is used to register variables of the
respective module by referring to the special module information specified in I/O
parameter. The variable and the comment can be modified.
To register special module variables, perform the following steps:
Step
154
Action
Set the special module on the slot in I/O parameter.
Select Global Variables/Address in the project window.
Select Global Variable tab in the Global Variable/Address window.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the menu, select Edit > Register Special Module Variables.

Honeywell
155
5. Variables
TIP
Registering Special Module Variables removes existing registered entries and
re-registers with the newly specified I/O parameters.
Preview
This function is used to view the preview of a screen to be printed.
To see the print preview, perform the following steps:
Step
1
Action
On the menu, select Project > Preview on the window for which you want to
preview.
156

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Step
Action
A preview of the screen to be printed is displayed.
TIP
The size of the columns can be changed to improve readability.
In View Address, all areas of the specified variable type are displayed
on the Direct Variable Comment window.
In Global Variable, incomplete variables displayed on the current

screen are also displayed on the Preview screen.
Print
It is used to print the window displayed on the screen in Global Variable, Direct Variable
Comment and Flag windows.
To print the data, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the menu, select Project > Print from the screen to print.
The project window is printed at the configured printer.
TIP
By changing the size of the column, the details to be printed on paper

can be adjusted
In Global Variable, incomplete variables displayed on the current

screen are also printed
Other functions
Sort
R200
11/09
Double-click the column header to sort the column data in the descending/
ascending sequence.
Current order of data is indicated by the direction of the arrow.

Honeywell
157
5. Variables
ATTENTION
It is available only in Global Variable and Flag.
If the Flag mode changes to Global Variable, variables is aligned to

display
View
Screen Zoom-In: Displays a magnified view of the screen. Select View >
Zoom-In on the menu.
Screen Zoom-Out: Displays a shrunk/reduced view of the screen. Select View >
Zoom-Out on the menu.
Use Combo Box for screen Zoom-In/Zoom-Out. Select the magnification rate in
combo box of the toolbar.
Width Automatic Adjust: adjusts the column size applicably to the String length
of the cell. Select View > Resize Width on the menu.
Height Automatic Adjust: adjusts the line height applicably to the String height
of the cell. Select View > Resize Height on the menu.
Shortcut Keys
Shortcut Keys
Home
Used to move to the starting point in the row.
End
Used to move to the end of the row.
Ctrl + Home
Used to move to the first cell position.
Ctrl + End
Used to move to the last cell position.
Shift + Ctrl + Home
To select from the current to the previous cells.
Shift + Ctrl + End
To select from the current to the last cells.
Shift + Page Up
To select from the cell to the page up position.
Shift + Page Down
To select from the cell to the page down position.
Shift + Tab,
Used to move to the next cell (right->left, bottom->top),

and to move to the last cell in the first row.
Shift + Enter
158
Comment

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Shortcut Keys
R200
11/09
Comment
Tab, Enter
Used to move to the next cell (left->right, top->bottom).

A new line is created after the last row.
Ctrl + Enter
Multi-line is entered in the comment column.

Honeywell
159
5. Variables
5.4. Local Variable
5.4
Local Variable
Local Variable declares the variables used in a program or displays the list of declared
variables.
Local Variable
You can declare variables and display the list of declared local variables.
160

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
5.5. Local Variable Edit
5.5
Local Variable Edit

On the list of the currently declared local variables, variable kind, variable name, type,
memory address, initial value, retain, use or not and comment can be edited. In addition,
it adds the local variables used in the program to the list of local variables.
Local Variable Registration

Local variables are automatically registered when all the attributes are filled.
Editing a Local Variable
A variable can be added, modified or deleted to/from the list of local variables.
a)
Variable kind: VAR, VAR_CONSTANT and VAR_EXTERNAL,

VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT are available.
b)
R200
11/09
If variable type is CONSTANT, it sets the initial value as the default (0).
If the variable type is VAR_EXTERNAL or
VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT, the columns of the initial value and
retain value are displayed as the defaults.
Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated within the Local
variable.
Honeywell
161
5. Variables
c)
The first character cannot be a number.
Special characters are not allowed with the exception of _.
Space is not allowed as a character.
The name cannot be identical to the name of a direct variable (i.e. MB4,
W4, RW9)
If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a

variable.
Type: 23 types are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types.
Basic types(20):
(BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT,

LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE,
TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING)
Derived
types(3):
ARRAY(i.e. ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit (up to

3rd), STRUCT(i.e. STRUCT name display) => STRUCT type is no
available in STRCT, FB_INST(i.e., FB name display)
d)
Memory address: enter it by using direct variable (I, Q, M, R, and W).
e)
Initial value: default value can be set.
f)
Retain: if memory allocation is set, retain column is inactive.

Always retain area.
M:
Check it by obtaining basic parameter information.
I, Q:
Always not retain area.
g)
Used: display whether to use a declared variable.
h)
Comment: all characters are available.
i)
Multi line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key.
Line validity: To register on global variable window, it needs Variable

kind/Variable Name and type.
162
R, W:
A local variable not registered as a global variable, is highlighted in pink.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
ATTENTION
An error that occurs when editing a cell is highlighted in pink.
Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit.

This function for local variables is identical to that for global variables.
For information on the Copy, Cut, Delete, Paste, Insert Line, Delete Line,
Automatic fill, Drag and Drop, Undo/Redo, and Export to file, refer section on
Global/Direct Variable Edit of this document.
Add EXTERNAL Variable

The list created by the Global Variable can be loaded using the Add External Variable
function.
To add external variables:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the menu, select Edit > Add EXTERNAL Variable.
The Global Variable Selection dialog box is displayed.

Honeywell
163
5. Variables
Step
164
Action

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
5.6. Function Block Variable
5.6
Function Block Variable

Function Block (FB) variables are a part of user defined function blocks. FB variable
stores operation results in a command such as timer and counter. You can go to user
defined function blocks in the project tree to add a function block.
FB Variable
You can either declare the variable or view the list of declared FB variables.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
165
5. Variables
5.7. FB Variable Edit
5.7
FB Variable Edit
You can edit the variable kind, variable name, type, trigger, memory address, initial
value, retain, use or not and comment of the already declared FB variables in the list. In
addition, a new FB variable can be added to the list of the FB variables.
FB Variable Registration
FB variables, like eth global variables and local variables must be registered before they
can be used in a program.
Registering an FB Variable
A variable can be added to the list of FB variables, modified or deleted from it.
a)
Variable kind: VAR, VAR_CONSTANT, VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT,

VAR_IN_OUT, VAR_EXTERNAL and VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT
are available.
If a variable type is CONSTANT, the initial value is set as the default.
166
VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT and VAR_IN_OUT cannot set the

initial value.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
b)
c)
Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical
name.
A figure is not available for the first character.
Special characters are not available, with the exception of _.
Space is not available as a character.
A direct variable with the same name is not available (i.e. MB4, W4,
RW9,)

variable.
Basic type(20):

LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE,
TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING)
Derived type(3):
ARRAY( , ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit (up to

3rd), STRUCT(i.e. STRUCT name display) => STRUCT type is
not available in STRUCT(i.e. FB name display)
d)
Trigger: it is VAR_INPUT or VAR_IN_OUT and active only in BOOL type;

it can set R and F status.
e)
Memory address: it cannot be declared as Read Only.
f)
Initial Value: it can be set.
g)
Retain: it cannot be declared as Read Only.
h)
Used: it cannot be declared as Read Only.
i)
Comment: every character is available.
j)
Line validity: To register on global variable window, it needs variable type,

variable and type.
R200
11/09
Initial value cannot be set if the variable type is VAR_INPUT,

VAR_OUTPUT or VAR_IN_OUT.
An FB variable not registered as a global variable is displayed in pink.

Honeywell
167
5. Variables
ATTENTION
An error that occurs when editing a cell is displayed in pink.

This function for FB variables is identical to that for global variables and local variables.
Add EXTERNAL Variable

The list created by Global Variable can be loaded by Add External Variable.
To add external variable:
Step
168
Action
On the menu, select Edit > Add EXTERNAL Variable.
The Global Variable Selection dialog box is displayed.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Step
R200
11/09
Action

Honeywell
169
5. Variables
5.8. FUNCTION Variable
5.8
FUNCTION Variable
Function (FUN) variables are a part of user defined functions. FUN Variables do not
store the operation results. You can go to user defined function blocks in the project tree
to add a function.
FUN Variable
FUN variable either declares the variable or displays the list of declared FUN variables.
170

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
5.9. FUN Variable Edit
5.9
FUN Variable Edit

On the list of the currently declared FUN variables, variable kind, variable name, type,
trigger, memory address, initial value, retain, used and comment items can be edited. In
addition, a new FUN variable can be added to the list of the FUN variables.
FUN Variable Registration

The FUN variables must be registered before they can be used in a program.
Registering FUN Variable
A variable can be added to the list of FUN variables, modified or deleted from it.
R200
11/09
a)
Variable Kind: VAR, VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_IN_OUT and

VAR_RETURN are available.
b)
Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical
name.
Special characters with the exception of _ are not available.

Honeywell
171
5. Variables
c)
The name of the FUN variable must not be same as that of a direct
variable.

variable.
Basic types(20):

LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME,
DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING)
Derived types(2):
ARRAY(i.e. ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit (up

to 3rd), STRUCT(i.e. STRUCT name display) => STRUCT type
is no available in STRCT
d)
Used: it cannot be declared as Read Only.
e)
f)
Line validity: To register on FB variable window, it needs variable type,

variable and type.
- If not registered on FB variable, it displays in pink.

TIP
If any error occurs when editing a cell, it is displayed in pink.

This function of FUN variables is identical to that for global variables, local variables,
and FUN variables.
172

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Export to file
It is used to save the previously declared list of global variables on the file and to open
and read in the external programs.
To export a file:
R200
11/09

Honeywell
173
5. Variables
5.10. Editing Variables
5.10 Editing Variables

You can edit the variable, type, memory allocation, initial value, retain and comment
from the list of the already declared data types. In addition, it adds the data type used in
the program to the list of data types.
Variable Registration
A variable must be registered before it can be used in a program.
Registering a variable
A variable can be added to, modified or deleted from the list of variables.
a)
174
Variable Name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical
name.
Special characters with the exception of _ are not available.
A name same with direct variable cannot be used as a name

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
5.10. Editing Variables
b)

variable.
Type: 21 types are available; 20 basic types and 1 derived types
Basic types (20):

LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME,
DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING)
Derived types(1):
ARRAY(i.e. ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit (up

to 3 rd)
c)
Memory address: Read Only.
d)
Initial Value: Read Only.
e)
Retain: Read Only.
f)
TIP
If any error occurs when editing a cell, it is displayed in pink.
Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste Insert Line, Delete Line, Automatic fill, Drag and Drop,
Undo/Redo
This function is identical for global variables, local variables, and FB/FUN variables.
Export to file
It is used to save the previously declared list of global variables on the file and to open
and read in the external programs.
To export a file:
R200
11/09

Honeywell
175
5. Variables
5.11. User-defined Function/Function Block
5.11 User-defined Function/Function Block

A user can personally create and use a function/function block, which is not provided by
SoftMaster. The user-defined function/function block can be created as follows.
Create the user-defined function/function block program
Create the user-defined function/function block I/O variable
User-defined function/function block programming
Compile(register) the user-defined function/function block
Use it in a scan program
176

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Creating User-defined Function/Function Block Program

In order to create a user-defined function/function block, select Project > Add Item
Function or Project > Add Item > Function Block.
R200
11/09
a)
Program Name: used to enter a user-defined function/function block. When

the user-defined function/function is registered, the input name is registered.
b)
Language: used to select a programming language for the user-defined

function/function block. A user-defined function is created only by the LD
language while a user-defined function block can be created by either the LD
or SFC language.

Honeywell
177
5. Variables
c)
Use EN/ENO: used to select whether to use or not EN/ENO, which is used
under the operation condition of function/function block. If not selecting
EN/ENO, a user should declare BOOL type variable in the first input and first
output parameters of the function/function block.
d)
Return Data Type: designates a type of the results after a user-defined

function is executed. It is activated only when a user-defined function is
created.
e)
Program description: used to enter the comment of a user-defined

function/function block. If unnecessary, the comment does not have to be
entered.
f)
OK: saves the entry in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.
g)
Cancel: cancels the entry in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.
ATTENTION
178
Clicking OK creates a new item with the name entered in the item of
user-defined function/function block.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Creating User-defined Function/Function Block I/O Variable

To create user-defined Function/Function Block I/O variable, perform the following
steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
If double-clicking a local variable among the items created with the name of
user-defined function/function block, the following local variable screen is
created.
Add input variable, I/O variable and output value in the local variable screen.
Depending on the added I/O variables, the function/function block type is
automatically changed on the bottom of the local variable screen.

Honeywell
179
5. Variables
Step
Action
a)
VAR_RETURN: A type of variable recurrenting the value of user-defined

function. It is automatically created as a variable with the same name of the
user-defined function with return type designated when creating a user-defined
function.
b)
Function type: used to automatically display input variable, I/O variable,

function/function block type by output variable in the local variable screen.
The type is as same as when using the user-defined function/function block in
the scan program.
ATTENTION
There should be at least one or more input and output variables with
a maximum limit of 32.
User-defined Function/Function Block Programming

For user-defined Function/Function Block Programming, perform the following steps:
180
Step
Action
If double-clicking a program among the items created with the newly entered
name in the user-defined function/function block, a program screen with the
previously designated language appears. The following screen shows the
screen created when selecting the LD.
Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Create a program, based on the variable input in the local variable screen.

Honeywell
181
5. Variables
ATTENTION
182
If local variable edit and program edit are finished, select

function/function block toolbar instruction to check whether the edited
user-defined function/function block is registered.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Using User-defined Function/Function Blocks

To use user-defined Function/Function Block, perform eth following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Open the program to use a user-defined Function/Function Block and

move the cursor to the position to input.
Click Function/Function Block Toolbar.
Select a user-defined Function/Function Block in the Function/Function

Block dialog box.

Honeywell
183
5. Variables
Step
184
Action
Enter the variable to be used in the input/output of function/function block.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
5. Variables
Step
R200
11/09
Action

Honeywell
185
5. Variables
186

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.1
Overview
LD program displays the PLC program through graphic signals of coils or contact points
used in the relay logic diagram.
6.2
Limits
There are functional limits in LD Program Edit as described in the following table.
R200
11/09
Item
Description
Maximum contact points
Maximum contact points

available to add in a line
Up to 31
Maximum lines
Maximum lines available

to edit
Up to 65535
Maximum Copy lines
Maximum Copy lines

available to copy at a time
Up to 300
Maximum Paste lines
Maximum Paste lines to

paste at a time
Up to 300

Honeywell
Limit
187
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
6.3
Program Edit
Edit Tools
The input of LD Edit items is started after the input symbols are selected from the LD
tool box and the mouse clicked on the specified position or with applicable Shortcut Key
pressed.
Symbol
188
Shortcut key
Description
Esc
Changes to selection
mode
F3
Normally open contact

point
F4
Normally closed contact

point
Shift + F1
Positive transition pulse

contact point
Shift + F2
Negative transition pulse

contact point
F5
Horizontal line
F6
Vertical line
Shift + F8
Connection line
Shift + F9
Reverse input
F9
Coil
F11
Reverse coil
Shift + F3
Set(latch) coil

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Symbol
Shortcut key
Description
Shift + F4
Reset(unlatch) coil
Shift + F5
Positive transition sensing

coil
Shift + F6
Negative transition
sensing coil
F10
Function/Function block
Shift + F7
Extended function
Ctrl+3
Normally opened OR
contact point
Ctrl+4
Normally closed OR
contact point
Ctrl+5
Positive-conversion
detection OR contact
point
Ctrl+6
Negative-conversion
detection OR contact
point
The following are the Shortcut Keys related to the movement of the cursor. Applicable
Shortcut Keys can be customized by users of SoftMaster.
Shortcut Key
R200
11/09
Description
Home
Moves to the start of the column.
Ctrl+Home
Moves to the start of the program
Back space
Deletes the current data and moves to the left.
Moves the current cursor to the right by a blank.
Moves the current cursor to the left by a blank.
Moves the current cursor upward by a blank.
Moves the current cursor downward by a blank.

Honeywell
189
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Shortcut Key
Description
End
Moves to the end of the column.
Ctrl + End
Moves to the last line edited.
TIP
Among Shortcut Keys in Edit Toolbox, s stands for Shift key, c for Ctrl
key.
(Example) Positive transition pulse contact point: Shift + F1 s + F1
sF1
The Shortcut Keys described in Edit Tool are based on the Shortcut
Keys basically provided in SoftMaster.
For setting details on the user defined Shortcut Keys, Refer to 2.4
Shortcut Setting in Chapter 2 Basic Application.
Input Contact point

This is used for adding contact points (normally open contact, normally closed contact,
Positive transition pulse contact and Negative transition pulse contact).
To add a contact point, perform the following steps:
Step
190
Action
Move the cursor to the location to insert the contact point.
On the tool box, select the type of the contact to insert and click the edit area.
Or click the Shortcut Key applicable to the contact to insert.
After the address name is inserted in the Variable Input dialog box, click OK.
Refer section on Variable/Address Input for details on the Variable Input
dialog box.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
TIP
Select Tool > Options on the menu. Select Common Editor under options. If
the Input mode is promptly released from the Edit page, the Variable Input
dialog box is not automatically displayed when inserting a contact point and
coil.
The basic operation of Enter key is to enter identical instructions used in

previous edit.
(Example) If a normally open contact is entered and entered in the previous
edit, the normally open contact input dialog box is displayed when the enter
key is pressed again.
Input OR contact point

Inputs OR contact point (Normally opened OR contact point, normally closed OR contact
point, Positive-conversion detection OR contact point, Negative-conversion detection OR
contact point).
To add an OR contact point, perform the following steps:
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor to the location to insert the OR contact point.

Honeywell
191
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
On the tool box, select the type of the contact to insert and click the edit area.
Or click the Shortcut Key applicable to the OR contact to insert.
After the address name is inserted in the Variable Input dialog box, click OK.
Refer section on Variable/Address Input for details on the Variable Input
dialog box.
ATTENTION
192
In duplicated mode, in case contact point is in cursor, OR

connection does not operate.
In application instruction etc, vertical line is not inserted.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Entering Variable/Address
It is used to enter the Address or Variable/Comment.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Variable Name
Used to enter a variable or declared variable name. If the input String is

of variable format and the applicable String is not registered as a
variable in the Variable/Comment, the Variable/Comment Add dialog
box is displayed.
Local variable
Displays the list of declared local variables
Address Comment
Displays the address

Honeywell
193
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Field Label
194
Description
Flag
Displays the list of flags. Detailed flag type can be selected on the flag
item.
List
Displays the list of flags for selection. System/High-speed Link/P2P/PID

Flags are available to select.
All
Selecting this option displays all the flags for the item. Clearing this
selection displays the flags applicable to the input parameter
number/block index only.
Parameter number
Used to enter the setting number for each selected flag item. 0~12 is
available for HS link, 0~8 for P2P and 0~63 for PID.
Block Index
Used to enter the block number for each selected flag item. 0~127 is
available for High-speed link and 0~63 for P2P.
Global variable
Click to display the list of global variables. It can be registered as an

EXTERNAL variable.
New Variable
Click to add a variable to the list of local variables

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Field Label
Description
Edit Variable
Click to edit a selected variable.
Delete Variable
Click to delete a selected variable from the list of Local Variables
OK
Click to save changes and close the dialog box.
Cancel
Click to close the dialog box.
Add/Edit Variable Name
R200
11/09

Honeywell
195
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Field Label
Description
Variable Name
Enter the name of the variable to be added.
Data Type
Select a data type for the variable.
Variable Kind
Select a variable type.
Address
Allocate a direct address for the variable.
Initial value
Enter the initial value for the variable.
Trigger
Select the trigger state for the variable.
Retain
Select to retain the current state of the variable.
Description
Enter a description for the variable.
TIP
If the variable name is entered on the Variable/Address dialog box, it is
automatically completed based on the currently displayed Variable/Comment
list.
Inserting lines
Insert a horizontal line for horizontal connection between LD Edit factors, and a vertical
line for vertical connections.
Inserting a horizontal line
To insert a horizontal line, perform the following steps:
Step
196
Action
Move the cursor to the location to connect.
Select the Shortcut Key of Horizontal Line Input. Or select Horizontal Line on
the tool box and select the Edit area to insert the Horizontal Line.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Inserting a vertical line

To add a vertical line, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to connect.
Select the Shortcut Key of Vertical Line Input. Or select Vertical Line on the
tool box and select the Edit area to insert the Vertical Line.
TIP
The vertical line is inserted to the left of the current location of the cursor.
Inserting Coil
It is used to insert the coils (coil, reverse coil, Positive transition pulse coil and Negative
transition pulse coil).
To insert reverse coil/ Positive transition pulse coil/ Negative transition pulse coil,
R200
11/09

Honeywell
197
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location where the coil is to be inserted.
On the tool box, select the type of coil to insert and then click the edit area.
Or click the Shortcut Key applicable to the coil to insert it.
After a variable name is entered on the Variable Selection dialog box, click
OK.
TIP
If a coil and output related application instruction is entered, a horizontal

line is automatically inserted to connect with the left item.
In case there is duplicate coil, output to output module according to

status of last coil.
Inserting a function block

Enter a function (block) for operation.
To enter a function (block), perform the following steps:
Step
1
198
Action
Move the cursor to the location where the function (block) is to be entered.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
On the tool box, select the function (block) to enter and then click the edit
area. Or click the Shortcut Key applicable to the function (block) input.
Select a function/function block.
a)
R200
11/09
Name: Select the function (block) to use.

Honeywell
199
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
b)
Search: Used to search for the name of a function(block)
c)
List: Select function, function block or function/function block to

display the appropriate information.
d)
Category: Select a category for the function (block).
e)
Function list: displays the list of function(block) of a selected category
f)
Function information: displays the information and properties of a

function. In case of function, a user can set the properties of an input
parameter; in case of function block, a user can select the name and
class of an instance.
g)
OK: Click to apply the details and close the dialog box.
h)
Cancel: Click to close the dialog box.
On the Function (block) Input dialog box, enter the function (block), and then
click OK.
For additional information on the function (block), refer to the 2MLI CPU
Users manual.
Favorite Function Block

It displays a function block that is mostly used in the current project or is recently used.
Or, a user can register a function to frequently use in the future.
Viewing function block
To display a function block, perform the following steps:
200

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
On the menu, select View > Instruction Window.
Viewing Function block.

A function block is automatically registered when it is used in a LD program.
The function block is listed on the top of the list. If a function is already added
to the list, the item (function) is displayed on the top.
R200
11/09
If the current list selection is Most Recently Used, the function is determined
by the frequency of function block used.

Honeywell
201
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
TIP
A function block is automatically registered if the function block is

selected on the function block dialog box.
A function copied or pasted does not affect the frequency and the
recent use.
Viewing Favorite Function

It enables you to register a function block for frequent use in projects.
To register a function block, perform the following steps:
Step
202
Action
Select a Favorite Function in the Selection box.
Click Edit to view the list of Functions.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Favorite Function: displays the currently selected function. The content

displayed on the Favorite Function List is the content to be displayed in the
Command window.
Function List: displays the list of function blocks available for the current
project.
Add: Select a function and click Add to add the selected function to the
Favorite Function list.
Remove: Click to delete a selected function from the Favorite Function.
Up: Click to move a selected item to a higher level of the favorite function.
Down: Click to move a selected item to a lower level of the favorite function.
Clear All: Click to clear the current favorite function list.
OK: Click to check and save changes. It also closes the dialog box.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
203
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Use Function
Uses the function block on the list
To use the function block, perform the following steps:
Step
204
Action
Move the cursor to the position to insert a function.
Double-click a command to insert in the Command Window.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
TIP
It is also possible to drag an item to insert in the Command Window and
insert it to the LD program.
Entering comments
It is used to insert the Rung and Output Comment. The comment displayed at the start of
Rung is called Rung Comment, and the comment for the output factor is called Output
Comment.
Adding Rung Comment

To enter a rung comment, perform the following steps:
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor to the location to enter the rung comment.

Honeywell
205
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Select Edit > Comment/Label Input.

Enter the Comment and Label.
a)
Comment: used to select the Rung Comment to enter.
b)
Label: used to select the Label to enter.
c)
OK: Click to apply the selected details and close the dialog box.
d)
If the Rung Comment dialog box is displayed, enter the comment and click
OK.
Enter or edit the Rung Comment or the Output Comment.
206

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
R200
11/09
Action
a)
Comment: used to enter the details of the rung comment or the output
comment.
b)
OK: Click to apply the input details and close the dialog box.
c)

Honeywell
207
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Output Comment
To enter the output comment, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to enter the output comment.
Double-click or press Enter key.
Enter the output comment on the Output Comment dialog box and click OK.
TIP
You can enter an output comment only when an output is available.
Input Label
This is used to enter the label to refer to from the extended function of JMP.
To enter a label on a function, perform the following steps:
Step
208
Action
Move the cursor to the location to enter the label.
Select Edit > Insert Comment/Label.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the dialog box, select Label and press Enter or click OK.
On the Label dialog box, enter the label to add, and click OK.
d)
Label: Enter the name of the label.
e)
Label in: Displays the label currently in use in the same scan program.
Selecting an item on the Label in use, the selected item is entered.

Honeywell
209
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
TIP
A maximum of 16 English characters can be used for the label name.
The first character of the label cannot be an integer or a special

character.
Label Input rules are similar to the Variable/Comment Input rules. For
additional information on Variable/Comment Input rules, refer to
section on Variable/ Comment.
Insert Extension Function

It is used to insert the extension function such as insert/call subroutine and program end.
To insert an extension function, perform the following steps:
Step
210
Action
Move the cursor to the position to insert an extension function.
Select Edit > Tools > Extension Function.
Select an extension function to insert and click OK.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
a)
Extension: Shows an extended function or displays the inserted

extended function.
b)
Command List: displays the available extended function.
c)
OK: Click to apply a selected item and close the dialog box.
d)
TIP
Extension functions, SBRT and RET cannot be inserted at LD used in SFC
Action and Transition.
Insert Cell
It is used to insert a new cell at the current cursor position.
To insert a new cell, perform the following steps:
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor to the location to insert the cell.

Honeywell
211
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Select Edit > Insert Cell.
TIP
If inserting a cell in Function Block, a variable is also moved together.
Insert Line
It is used to insert a new line at the current cursor position.
To insert a line, perform the following steps:
Step
1
212
Action
Move the cursor to the location to insert the line in.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Select Edit > Insert Line.
TIP
a) If Insert Line is performed, a new line is inserted in the current cursor
position.
b) If an area is selected for Line Insert, new lines equal to the lines in
the selected area are inserted.
c) If the function block is contained, the line cannot be inserted.
Delete Item
It is used to delete the input contact point, coil, function block, line, rung/output
comment and label.
To delete an item, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor to the location to delete the item.
Select Edit > Delete.

Honeywell
213
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Delete Cell
It is used to delete factors such as the input contact point and horizontal line to draw in
the next cell.
To delete cell (input contact point and horizontal line), perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to delete the cell from.
Select Edit > Delete Cell.
TIP
Position the cursor on the cell to be deleted and press Delete on the
keyboard. Alternately, right-click and select Delete from the context menu.
214

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Delete Line
It is used to delete all the cells in the selected row.
To delete a line, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Move the cursor onto the line to delete.
Select Edit > Delete Line.
Copy/Cut/Paste
It is used to copy data from a selected area, or cut the data to copy at a specific position.
Unlike Copy, the Cut function deletes the data from the selected area.
Copy and paste
To copy the data to windows clipboard:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the area to copy.
Move the cursor to the area to paste.

Honeywell
215
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Cut and paste

To cut and paste selected data, perform the following steps:
Step
216
Action
Select the area to cut.
Move the cursor to the area to paste on.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Undo and Redo

It is used to Undo the details edited by Program Edit back to its previous state, or execute
the cancelled action again.
Undo (example of Delete)
To undo a particular action, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor onto the position to delete.

Honeywell
217
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
On the menu, select Edit > Undo.
Redo (example of Delete)

To redo a particular action:
Select Edit > Redo.
TIP
All the edited details can be cancelled or executed again.
The number of times to cancel the execution is unlimited.
Program Edit Mode

LD Program supports two modes; Insert Mode and Overwrite mode. It is applied when
inserting a contact point or function (block).
Insert mode:
Overwrite mode:
218

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
TIP
Use Insert key on the keyboard to toggle between Overwrite and Insert.
If inserting a contact point

Overwrite mode: if entering a different type of contact point, the only contact point type
is changed with the input address or variable remained (it does not work if a same type
contact point is selected).
Insert mode: always inserts a new contact point to a designated position, regardless of
contact point type. Insertion operation is as same as Insert Cell.
If inserting a function (block)

Overwrite mode: inserts a function (block) into the current position.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
219
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program Edit
Insert mode: it inserts a space as high as a function (block) if there is not enough space to
insert the function. Insert Space is as same as Insert Line.
220

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
6.4. Viewing Program Options
6.4
Viewing Program Options
View IL Program
It is used to convert the LD program to the IL program and displays with the IL program.
To view an IL program, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select a program.
Select View > IL.
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
In case of an incomplete rung in the program, the LD program cannot be

converted to an IL program.
Edit is not possible in IL View.

Honeywell
221
6. LD Edit
Program Magnification Change

This is used for changing the magnification of the LD program displayed on the screen.
Zoom-In
To Zoom-in, select View > Zoom-In on the menu.
Zoom-Out
To Zoom-out, select View > Zoom-Out on the menu.
TIP
Hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and spin the mouse
wheel forward to zoom-in.
Hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and spin the mouse
wheel backward to zoom-out.
On the View Tool selection box, the user can select or directly enter
the magnification.
For additional information on Tool bars, see section on Tool Bar
View Address
It is used for displaying only the name of the address for the variable or address used as
the contact point, coil and function (block). If there is no address, it displays a name of
variable.
To view an address:
222
Select View > Addresses.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
View Variables
It is used for displaying the name of the variable for the variable or address used as the
contact point, coil and function (block).
If no variable is declared for the address, it is displayed as the address name.
To view variables:
Select View > Variables.
View Address/Variables
It is used for displaying the name of the address/variable for the variable or address used
in the contact point, coil and function (block).
If there is no address in the variable, the variable name is displayed.
To view address/variable:
R200
11/09
Select View > Address/Variables.

Honeywell
223
6. LD Edit
View Address/Comment
It is used for displaying the address/comment for the variable or address used in the
contact point, coil and function (block).
If there is no address in the variable, the variable name is displayed.
To view an address/comment:
Select View > Address/Comments.
TIP
If View Options are changed, it may take some time according to the
amount of the edited program steps
Print function of the Address/Variable/Comment is available. For the

details of print option, refer section on LD Program Print.
View Variables/Comments
It is used for displaying the variable/comment for the device used as the operand of the
contact point, coil and application instruction.
To view a variable/comment:
Select View > Variables/Comments.
ATTENTION
224
If View Options are changed, it may take some time according to the
number of the edited program steps.
Print function of the Device/Variable/Comment is available.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
Adjust No. of Contact Point

It is used to adjust the number of contact points displayed on the screen. Here, the
number of contact points is the total number (horizontal cell - 1), excluding the output
position.
To adjust the number of contact point:
On the menu, select View > Change Columns > Increase Columns.
If the data on the right of the current screen is larger than the number of contact points to
display, it may be displayed by rung including arrow.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
225
6. LD Edit
TIP
It may increase or decrease one by one in [View]-[Toolbox]
The number of contact to set is 9 ~ 32.
The number of contact points minimally set in LD program used for

SFC action and transition is 5.
LD View Properties
It is used to select the viewing options of the LD Screen. In the screen properties, the
options of address, variable and comment view can be set while magnification and the
number of contact points can be set simultaneously.
To view LD screen properties, perform the following steps:
Step
226
Action
On the menu, select View > LD Properties.
Change the LD screen properties and click OK.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
View Option
Indicates the view options for variable and

address.
Magnification
Indicates the magnification on the screen. It

is allowed from 40 to 200%.
No. of contacts
Indicates the number of contact points

displayed on the screen.
OK
Click to apply the settings and closes the

dialog box.
Cancel
Apply
Click to apply the settings to the current LD

window.
Default
Click to set the current settings as the

defaults of LD window. If creating a new LD
program, it is displayed in the currently set
view mode.
Reset
Click to restore the current settings to the

default.
All Windows
Click to apply current settings to all screens.
TIP
R200
11/09
In the LD screen properties, Address + Variable + Comment View

Options cannot be set.
In case of All Windows, the setting is applied to all of SFC program

action, transition and users function(block) created by LD.

Honeywell
227
6. LD Edit
6.5. Additional Edit Function
6.5
Additional Edit Function

Additional functions for convenient edit are described as follows.
Optimize Program
It is used for deleting the horizontal and empty lines between the contact points so to
optimize the position where LD diagram will be drawn.
To optimize the program, perform the following steps.
228
Select Edit > Optimize Program

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
ATTENTION
Optimize Program if once executed cannot be back to its previous state

through execution cancel.
It may take some time according to the size of the program.
In case LD logic is not complete, optimization function doesnt operate.
Block Mask Instruction

This is used to specify or cancel the area Block Mask in the PLC among the LD
programs.
Block Mask Instruction Setting
To edit the block mask instruction settings, perform the following steps:
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor to the rung to specify the Block Mask.

Honeywell
229
6. LD Edit
Step
2
Action
Select Edit > Set Block Mask.
Canceling Block Mask Instruction

To remove the block mask instruction, perform the following steps:
Step
230
Action
Move the cursor to the rung to cancel the Block Mask instruction.
On the menu, select Edit > Remove Block Mask.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
Step
Action
Bookmark
It enables the user to easily move to a specific area with the bookmark specified on the
line.
Set Bookmark
To set a bookmark, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor to a line to specify the bookmark on.
On the menu, select Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove.

Honeywell
231
6. LD Edit
Step
Action
Reset Bookmark
To reset a bookmark, perform the following steps:
Step
232
Action
Move the cursor to the line to cancel the bookmark from.
On the menu, select Edit > Bookmark > Set/Reset.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
Step
Action
Reset All Bookmarks

To reset all bookmarks, select Edit > Bookmark > Remove All.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
233
6. LD Edit
Previous Bookmark
To edit the previous bookmark, select Edit > Bookmark > Previous Bookmark.
234

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
Next Bookmark
To edit the next bookmark, select Edit > Bookmark > Next Bookmark.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
235
6. LD Edit
TIP
Bookmark is specified on the line unit.
Bookmark is not an item to edit, thus the Set/Reset options are not
included in Undo and Redo.
Go To
Finding specific line
It is used to move to the specified line position, or go to the position of the edited label
and rung comment.
To find a specific line in the program, perform the following steps:
Step
1
236
Action
On the menu, select Find/Replace > Go To > Step/Line.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Go to line
Used to specify the line to go to
Program list
Used to display the list of the current PLC

programs
Go to
Click to close the dialog box and go to the

selected programs step.
Cancel
Enter the step to move to, on the dialog box.
TIP
R200
11/09
It is available only in the LD program.
This function is not available for the LD used for SFC

Action/Transitions.

Honeywell
237
6. LD Edit
Finding specific Label

To find a specific label, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Find/Replace > Go To > Label.
Select the label to go to on the dialog box.
Field Label
238
Description
Program
Displays the list of the current PLC programs. If All

Programs is selected, the list of all the labels is
displayed.
Labels list
Displays the list of the labels used in the selected

program.
Go To
Closes the dialog box to go to the selected label.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
TIP
Go To Label is available only in the LD Program.
This function is not available for the LD used for SFC

Action/Transition.
Finding specific Rung Comment

To find a specific comment in a program, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the menu, select Find/Replace > Go To > Rung Comment.
Select the rung comment to go to on the dialog box.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Program
: used to display the list of the

current PLC programs. If All
Programs is selected, the list of all
the rung comments is displayed.
Rung comment list
: used to display the list of the rung

Honeywell
239
6. LD Edit
Step
Action
comments used in the selected
program.
Go to
closes the dialog box to go to the

selected rung comment.
Cancel
closes the dialog box.
TIP
Go To Rung Comment is available only in the LD Program.
The LD used for SFC Action/Transition is not available in Go To.
Finding END command

To go to the END command, perform the following steps:
Step
240
Action
On the menu, select Find/Replace > Go To > END Command.
Select the END command to go to on the dialog box.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
6. LD Edit
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Program
Used to display the list of the current PLC

programs. If All Programs is selected, the
list of all the END instructions is displayed.
END instruction list
Used to display the list of the END

instructions used in the selected program.
Go to
Closes the dialog box to go to the selected

END instruction.
Close
TIP
R200
11/09
Go To END Instruction is available only in the LD Program.
The LD used for SFC Action/Transition is not available in Go To.

Honeywell
241
7. SFC Edit
7.1
Overview
SFC is used for controlling the execution sequence of other programs (LD, ST) by using
graphic symbols (step, transition, Branch).
7.2
SFC program limitations

SFC program has the following limitations when editing a program.
Item
R200
11/09
Description
Limit
Max. step no.
Indicates the maximum number of available

steps excluding the step used as step
variable in the program.
512 steps
Max. row no.
Maximum number of editable rows.
65,535 rows
Max. column no.
Maximum number of editable columns.
65,535 columns

Honeywell
243
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
7.3
Program Edit
Edit Tools
To begin entering the inputs of SFC Edit items, select the input symbols from the LD tool
box and click on a specific location or press the associated shortcut key.
Symbol
Shortcut Key
Description
Esc
Changes to selection mode
Step+Transiton or Transition+Step
Action
Block+Transition or transition+block
Label
Jump
Left Branch
Right Branch
The following Shortcut Keys are related with the movement of the cursor. Applicable
Shortcut Keys can be specified by users in the SoftMaster.
Shortcut Key
244
Description
Home
Moves to the start of the column.
Ctrl + Home
Moves to the start of the program
Deletes the current data and moves to the left.
Moves the current cursor to the right by a blank.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Shortcut Key
Description
Moves the current cursor to the left by a blank.
Moves the current cursor upward by a blank.
End
Moves the current cursor downward by a blank.
Ctrl + End
Moves to the end of the column.
ATTENTION
Among Shortcut Keys in Edit Toolbox, s stands for Shift key, c for
Ctrl key, a for Alt key
The Shortcut Keys described in Edit Tool are based on the Shortcut
Keys basically provided in SoftMaster. For more details on the user
defined Shortcut Keys, Refer to 3.4 Shortcut Key Settings in Chapter
3 Basic Application.
For each SFC program added to the project program list, at least 64
words of automatic variables must have been declared.
Input step/transition
This is used to insert a Step/Transition in a program.
To insert a Step/Transition, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor to the location you want edit.
Select symbol on the tool box and click the edit area. Or press shortcut key
applicable to symbol.
A new Step/Transition is inserted.

Honeywell
245
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
ATTENTION
Step name is allocated automatically; it can however be edited.
According to input location, Step + Transition or Transition + Step are

inserted.
Item of location selected
Step +
Transition
Transition, start line of parallel branch, label, selection

branch termination line
Transition
+ Step
Step, Block, start line of selection branch, parallel

branch termination line
246
Read Only variables cannot be used for Step/Transition variable.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Input Action
Action is executed when step is activated. Executes the program connected with action.
To edit the symbol in a program, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location you want to edit
Select symbol on the tool box and click the edit area. Or press shortcut key
Or
or
R200
11/09

Honeywell
247
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
ATTENTION
Actions location is different according to selected edit area.
Location
item
Right
Actions location is the right of step when selecting step
Bottom
Actions location is the bottom of action when selecting

action
The no. of step connected with one step is not limited.
Action cannot be connected with block.
Input Block/Transition
Inputs Block/Transition.
To insert a Block/Transaction, perform the following steps:
Step
248
Action
Move the cursor to the block you want edit.
Select a block on the tool box and click the edit area or click the shortcut key
New block/Transition is inserted.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
ATTENTION
Block input location standard is same as step input.
Input label
Inputs label.
To ass a label, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the tool box, select the label to enter and then click the edit area. Or click
the Shortcut Key applicable to symbol.
The new label is inserted.

Honeywell
249
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
ATTENTION
Label can be inserted when selecting step or block.
Label is inserted ahead of the selected step or block.
Input Jump
To insert a jump in a program, perform the following steps:
Step
250
Action
Move the cursor to the location you want to edit
On the tool box, select the Jump to insert and then click the edit area. Or click
the Shortcut Key applicable to symbol.
A new jump is inserted.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
ATTENTION
The jump can be inserted when selecting the last transition within
selection branch or transition of program in the last row.
The jump is inserted ahead of the selected transition.
The Jump is available within the same program.
Create left branch

Create left branch. Example is the selection branch.
Make branch
To make a branch perform the following steps:
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor to the location to start branch.

Honeywell
251
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
On the tool box, select the left branch and click the edit area or press
shortcut key.
It displays branch start location and branch connection location.
Branch start location

Branch termination location
252
Move cursor to the branch end location.
Select the branch end location.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
6
Action
The branch is created.
ATTENTION
When selecting the branch start location, the selection branch or

parallel branch is created according to the branch start location.
Item of branch start
location
Line shape
Selection branch
Step, block
Horizontal one line
Parallel branch
Transition
Horizontal two line
Extending branch
To extend a branch, perform the following steps:
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor to the branch to extend.

Honeywell
253
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
On the tool box, select the left branch and click the edit area or press
appropriate shortcut key.
A new branch is created.
ATTENTION
The maximum number of branches is limited to the number of rows.
Create right branch

Creating a right branch. Example is parallel branch.
Make branch
To make a branch at a location, perform the following steps:
254

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to start the branch.
On the tool box, select the right branch and click the edit area. Or press
shortcut key.
It displays the branch start location and the branch connection location.
Branch start location
Branch termination location
R200
11/09
Move the cursor to the branch termination location.

Honeywell
255
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Select the branch end location.
The branch is created.
ATTENTION
256
The procedure to create a parallel branch is same as creating a left

branch. Refer section on create left branch.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Extending branch
To extend a branch of a location, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor to the location to extend the branch.
On the tool box, select the right branch and click the edit area. Or press
shortcut key.
New branch is inserted.

Honeywell
257
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Edit Step Property

Edit step name, comment etc.
To edit Step property of a location, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location you want to edit.
Press Enter key or double-click the mouse.
Field Label
258
Description
Name
Enter the name of the step.
Comment
Enter a comment for the step.
Initial step
Designates it as initial step.
Step variable
Refers to step name from local variable list.
Find
To find a variable from the local variable list.
OK
Click to save the contents and close window
Cancel
Click to close window without saving.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
ATTENTION
The initial step is execution start step of program. You can designate
only one. When checking the program, it checks the error.
When using step variable, you can refer it from other programs.
Transition property
Edit the transitions name, comment.
To edit the transition property of a location, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action

Honeywell
259
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Name
Enter transitions name.
Comment
Enter the transitions comment.
Type
Select transition as variable or program.
List
Displays the other transition used in the

current program.
Find
You can select variable from local variable

list.
Less
Hides the list.
OK
Saves the contents and closes window.
Cancel
Closes window.
ATTENTION
Transition program can be written by LD program.
Action property
Edit the actions name, comment, and qualifier.
To edit the Action property of a location, perform the following steps:
Step
260
Action

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Name
Enter the name of the action.
Comment
Enter a comment for the action.
Type
Designates action as variable or program.
Post scan
Deactivates the coil in the action after

executing the action.
List
Displays the other actions used in the current

program.
Qualifier
Acts differently according to action qualifier.
Time
Enters time according to qualifier.
Find
You can select variable from local variable

list.
Honeywell
261
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
262
Action
Less
Hides the list.
OK
Saves the contents and close window.
Cancel
Closes window.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
ATTENTION
Action can operate differently according to the action qualifier.

Qua
lifier
.
Action characteristic
activated status step
N (Nonstored)
Action is executed when step is

activated.
R (overriding
Reset)
When the step is activated, the action

whose qualifier is S, SD, DS, and SL
stops.
S (Set)
If the step is activated, it continues its

execution unit R qualifier is executed.
L (time
Limited)

execution when the time is being set.
D (time
Delayed)
If the step is activated, the action starts

after setting the time.
P (Pulse)

execution during one scan.
SD (Stored
& time
Delay)
If the step is activated, action starts after

setting time and it continues its execution
unit until R qualifier is executed. If R
qualifier is executed before setting time,
action is not executed.
DS (time
Delayed &
Stored)
If step is activated, action starts after

setting time and it continues its execution
unit until R qualifier is executed. If R
qualifier is executed before setting time
or step is deactivated, action is not
executed.
SL (Stored &
time Limited)
R200
11/09
Functions
It continues its execution when the time

is being set or unit R qualifier is
executed.

Honeywell
Action operating
R qualifier is executed
Setting time
1 scan execution
R
R
263
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
ATTENTION
You can insert a time expression such as T#1h2m3s T#2m

T#15s.
Action program can be written by LD ST or SFC.
Edit Block Property

Edit blocks property - name, comment and other details.
To edit the Block property of a location, perform the following steps:
Step
264
Action
Press Enter key or double-click the block.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
a)
Name: inserts the blocks name.
b)
Comment: inserts blocks comment.
c)
List: displays other block used in the current program.
d)
Less: hides list.
e)
OK: saves the contents and closes window
f)
Cancel: closes the window.

ATTENTION
R200
11/09
Block can be written by only SFC program.
Action cannot be connected with block.

Honeywell
265
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Edit label property

Edit labels name.
To edit Label property of a block, perform the following steps:
Step
266
Action
Move the cursor to the block you want to edit.
Press Enter key or double-click the block.
a)
Label: inserts the label.
b)
List: displays the name of other labels used in the current program.
Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
c)
OK: saves the contents and closes window.
d)
Cancel: closes the dialog box.
Jump property
Edit jumps name.
To edit Jump property of a program, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Press Enter key or double-click a block.

Honeywell
267
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
a)
Jump: inserts a jumps name.
b)
List: displays other label used in the current program.
c)
OK: saves the contents and closes window.
d)

ATTENTION
Ensure that the name of the Jump is the same as label name.
Jump to other SFC program is not available.
Set Branch Priority

You can set branch priority.
To set branch priority, perform the following steps:
Step
1
268
Action
Move the cursor to the select branchs start location.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
On the menu, select Edit > Set Branch Priority.
Click the select branchs start location in order to set branch priority.
To complete the editing, click outside the selection branch.
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
You can set selection branch priority equal to the branch number.
When not setting branch priority, compilation is initiated from let to

right. Program is executed from left to right.

Honeywell
269
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Erase Branch Priority

Erase branch priority.
To erase branch priority, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the branch that has priority.
On the menu, select Edit > Erase Branch Priority.
Branch priority is erased.
Delete item
A step, transition, action, block, label, jump, and branch of a program can be deleted.
To delete an existing item, perform the following steps:
Step
270
Action
Move the cursor to the location where the item you want to delete exists.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
ATTENTION
The transition and blocks can be deleted by performing the above

step.
Sometimes deleting is not available. In this case, editing is canceled

automatically after warning message.
Deleting a branch deletes all items under the branch.
Copy/Cut/Paste
To Copy and paste data perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the block/function you want to copy.
Copied area is displayed.
Move the cursor to the location you want to paste.

Honeywell
271
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Select menu Edit > Paste.
ATTENTION
272
The item under step, transition and block can be copied with step,
transition and block according to selected location.
Sometimes pasting is not available according to the location to paste.

At this time, editing is canceled automatically.
When copying the branch start point, the item under branch is copied
with branch start point.
When pasting the branch, select the branch start point.
The selection branch can be pasted into the selection branch and the
parallel branch can be pasted into the parallel branch.
When pasting into the action, select the step you want to paste.
Principal to paste is same with item input.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Cut/Paste
To Cut and Paste data, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the location to cut.
Move the cursor to the location to paste.
On the menu, select Edit > paste.

Honeywell
273
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
Action
Undo and Redo

SoftMaster provides the standard undo and redo options.
Undo (example)
To undo an action, perform the following steps:
Step
1
274
Action
Place the cursor to the location you want to delete.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the menu, select Edit > Undo.
Editing is cancelled.

Honeywell
275
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program Edit
Redo (Example)
To redo an action perform the following steps:
Select Edit > Redo on the menu.
ATTENTION
Undo and Redo for all items.
Unlimited number of undo is available.
Program Edit Mode

SFC program supports only insert mode.
Insert mode:
276

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View Program
7.4
View Program
You can zoom in or out on a program.
Program zoom In/Out

Zoom In
To Zoom In on a program, perform the following steps:
On the menu, select View > Zoom In.
Zoom Out
To Zoom Out on a program, perform the following steps:
On the menu, select View > Zoom Out.

ATTENTION
Ctrl + Upward Wheel if available enable Zoom-Out step by step.
Ctrl + Downward Wheel if achieves perform Zoom-In step by step.
On the View Tool selection box, the user can select or directly enter
the level of magnification. Refer to section on Tool Box for additional
details.
SFC Property
It enables you to edit SFC property.
To edit SFC property, perform the following steps:
R200
11/09
Select menu Tools > Options > SFC.

Honeywell
277
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View Program
a)
Show comment: displays the comment of step, transition, action and block.
b)
Show print area: displays the printing area with thick dotted line.
c)
Show page number: displays page no. printed in the print area.
d)
Step column width: sets width of vertical column of step, transition location.
e)
Action column width: displays width of vertical column of action location.
f)
Utilize SFC split window: You can use SFC split window
g)
Split window position: You may decide in which direction the window gets
divided.
h)
Split window contents: You may decide which contents the program displays
in the split window.
ATTENTION
278
The range of the Step column is 20~200.
The range of the Action column is 70~400.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View Program
Show comment
<Not Showing comment>
<Showing comment>
Show print area
Show page number
R200
11/09

Honeywell
279
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View Program
Step column width
<Step column 68 pixel (basic) screen>
<Step column 100 pixel screen>
Action column width
<Action column100 pixel (basic) screen>
280
<Action column 150 pixel screen>

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View Program
Utilize SFC split window
<With split window>
<Without split window>
R200
11/09

Honeywell
281
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View Program
Split window contents
<Viewing the selected action, transition: when selecting action>
<Viewing the identical SFC program>
282

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View Program
<Viewing the fix split window contents: displays the previous screen>
Split window position
<Right>
R200
11/09

Honeywell
283
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View Program
<Bottom>
View Block/Action/Transition List
You can check other programs list used in the SFC program and edit the name and
comment.
To view Block/Action/Transition List, perform the following steps:
Step
284
Action
On the menu, select View > Block/Action/Transition List.
Displays list.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View Program
Open Action/Transition
In the SFC program, open the selected action, transition with the new window.
To open Action/Transition, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location you want to open program.
On the menu, select View > Open Action/Transition.
Open the selected program in a new window.
Address/Variables
Displays variables or address used in the contact, coil, function (block) as
Address/Variables name. If variable does not have an address, it displays the variable
name.
To view Address/Variables, perform the following steps:
R200
11/09
On the menu, select View > Address/Variables.

Honeywell
285
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View Program
Address/Comments
Displays variables or addresses used in the contact, coil, function (block) as
Address/Comment. If the variable does not have an address, it displays the name of the
variable.
To view Address/Comments, perform the following steps:
On the menu, select menu View > Address/Comments.
ATTENTION
Modifying the settings may result in increased viewing time based on

the program size.
When printing, Address/Variables/Comments is supported. For

additional information, refer to section on Printing.
Adjust Contact No.

It is used to adjust the number of contact points displayed on the screen. Here, the
number of contact points is equal to the total number (horizontal cell - 1), excluding the
output position.
To adjust the number of contact points, perform the following steps:
On the menu, select View > Change columns > contact no.
If the data to the right of the current screen is larger than the number of contact points to
display, it may be displayed by rung including arrow.
286

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View Program
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
It may increase or decrease one by one in View > Toolbox.
The number of contact to set is 9 ~ 31.
The number of contact points minimally set in LD program used for

SFC action and transition is 5.

Honeywell
287
7. SFC Edit
7.5. Edit additional Function
7.5
Edit additional Function

SoftMaster provides an Edit additional function for convenience of edit.
Bookmark setting
To set a bookmark, perform the following steps:
Step
288
Action
Move the cursor to the location you want to set bookmark.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
Remove Bookmark
To remove an existing bookmark, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location you want to remove bookmark.
Remove all bookmarks

To remove all bookmarks, perform the following steps:
R200
11/09
Select Edit > Bookmark > Remove all.

Honeywell
289
7. SFC Edit
Previous Bookmark
To remove previous bookmark, perform the following steps:
Select Edit > Bookmark > Previous Bookmark.
Next Bookmark
To remove next bookmark, perform the following steps:
290
Select Edit > Bookmark > Next Bookmark.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
ATTENTION
Bookmark is specified in cell unit.
Bookmark is not an item to edit, thus the Set/Reset options is not be

included in Undo and Redo.
Go To
You can go to designated line, edited label, rung comment.
Go to Step/Line
To use go to step/line command, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Find/Replace > Go To > Step/Line.
Select the step you want to move to, in the dialog box.

Honeywell
291
7. SFC Edit
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Go to line
Enter the line number you want to

go.
Program list
Displays the list of PLC programs.
Go to
Closes dialog box and goes to

selected step.
Close
Closes dialog box.
ATTENTION
292
Go To Line is available in the LD program.
It does not operate in the LD used in the SFC Action/Transition.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
Go To Label
To use go to Label command, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Find/Replace > Go To > Label.
Select label you want to go to in the dialog box.
Field Label
Description
Program
Displays current list of PLC programs. If you

select All program, it displays the list of all
labels.
Label list
Displays the list of labels used in the selected

program.
Go to
Closes dialog box and goes to selected label.
Close
Closes dialog box without save.
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
Go To Label operates in the LD program.
It does not operate about LD used in the SFC programs

Action/Transition.

Honeywell
293
7. SFC Edit
Go To rung comment
To use go to rung command, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Find/Replace > Go To > Rung comment.
Select the rung comment you want to go.
Field Label
294
Description
Program
Displays current PLC program list. If you select All

program, it displays list of all rung comment.
Label list
Displays list of rung comment used in the selected

program.
Go to
Closes dialog box and goes to selected rung

comment.
Close
Closes dialog box without save.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
ATTENTION
Go To Rung Comment is available in the LD program.

Action/Transition.
Go To END Command
To use go to end command, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Find/Replace > Go To > END Command.
Select the END command you want to go.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Program
Displays current PLC program list. If you

select All program, it displays list of all
END command.
Label list
Displays the list of END command used in

the selected program.
Go to
Closes dialog box and goes to selected

END comment.
Close
Closes the dialog box without saving.

Honeywell
295
7. SFC Edit
ATTENTION
296
Go To END command is available in the LD program.

Action/Transition.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
7. SFC Edit
R200
11/09

Honeywell
297
8. Programming
8.1
Cross Reference
It is used to display the application details of all the Addresses and variables used in a
program. It includes contact points (normally open contact point, normally closed contact
Points, Positive transition pulse contact point and Negative transition pulse contact
point), coils (coil, reverse coil, Positive transition pulse coil and Negative transition pulse
coil), I/O parameter of function(block) and all the addresses and variables used as the
operand of extended functions.
View All Addresses

It is used to display all the addresses used in the current PLC.
To view all the addresses in a PLC, on the menu, select View > Cross Reference.
Column
R200
11/09
Details
Address
Displays the names of all the addresses used in the current PLC
Variable
Name
Displays the names of all variables used in the current PLC.
PLC
Displays names of PLC belonging to the current program
Program
Displays the name of the program using the applicable address.

Honeywell
299
8. Programming
8.1. Cross Reference
Column
Details
Position
Displays the coordinates inside the program.
Comment
Displays the comment of address and variables.

The following signs are displayed for the type of instructions;
-( )-: Coil
-(/)-: Reverse coil
-(S)-: Set coil
-(R)-: Reset coil
-(P)-: Positive transition pulse coil
Information
-(N)-: Negative transition pulse coil

-| |-: Normally open contact point
-|/|-: Normally closed contact point
-|P|-: Positive transition pulse contact point
-|N|-: Negative transition pulse contact point
-[F]-: Extended function parameter
-VAR-: Function(block) I/O parameter
Data Sorting
Click the column header to sort the applicable column. Whenever the column is clicked,
it is sorted in the ascending and then descending sequence repeatedly. A triangle is
displayed on the basic column of the current alignment. The normal triangle indicates
that the data is sorted in the ascending sequence, and a reverse triangle indicates that the
data is sorted in the descending sequence.
Example.1) Alignment in the ascending sequence based on the address names
Example.2) Alignment in the descending sequence based on the address names
300

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
Go To
It is used to go to the position of the program using the selected address. Double-click the
applicable line, or right-click to select Go To on the menu.
Select Row
It is used to display the specific data only on the screen. Right-click and select each item
from the Select Row menu.
Lock Data
Details of the Cross Reference Window are updated when the cursor moves in the
program. If you dont want to update them, specify the Fix function. Right-click and
select Lock Data.
Delete Data
It deletes all the details of the Cross Reference Window.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
301
8. Programming
Output Cross Reference Instantly

If an address or variable is selected in the program, the used position and the application
are displayed.
To view the output cross-reference instantly, perform the following steps:
Step
302
Action
Select the Cross Reference tab to display the Cross Reference Result.
Move the cursor to the position of the address to display its purpose.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
ATTENTION
If Output cross reference instantly is used, the edit speed is likely

to slow down.
Select Tools > Options > Edit Ladder/Mnemonic, on the Edit page
to apply Output cross reference instantly function.
Check Duplicate Coil Instantly

This function is used to check the applicable address or variable if used as duplicate
whenever the coil is edited. If the address is used as a coil in a different location inside
the PLC, the list for the program name, location and step is displayed.
To check a duplicated coil instantly, perform the following steps:
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
Add a coil.

Honeywell
303
8. Programming
Step
304
Action
Select and copy the line where the applicable coil is included. Move to the
next line and paste.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
If check duplicated coil instantly is used, the edit speed may be

slow.
Select Tools > Options > Edit Ladder/Mnemonic, on the Edit page
to apply Check duplicated coil instantly function.
Check duplicated coil instantly checks the coil and the reverse coil,
Positive transition pulse coil and Negative transition pulse coil only.

Honeywell
305
8. Programming
8.2. Used Address
8.2
Used Address
It shows all the addresses and the number used in the program (LD, SFC). The addresses
used in each address area according to the designated types are displayed as classified
into input and output.
a)
Address Display: displays each address used in the program.
b)
Word Column: used to display the number of the applicable address types
used in the program. The column displays the number in accordance with the
address type designated when executing the address used.
c)
Bit Column: used to display the number of applicable bit addresses used in
the program. The addresses of S area, T area and C area are displayed. The
column displays the addresses of the types smaller than those designated when
executing the used address in bit type. Therefore, if designating word type, it
displays the bit only. If the column designates 16 data types, 8 columns are
created.
d)
I/O classification: used to display the number of applicable bit addresses as

classified into input (I) and output (O).
e)
It displays there is 1 address using the 5th bit of %MW1 as the output.
f)
It displays there is 1 address using %MW2 as the input.
Viewing Used Address

To view a used address:
Step
306
Action
Select View > Used Address.
Select a desirable Address on the Used Address selection dialog box.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
8.2. Used Address
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Address Area Selection
Selects an address area. The available areas

are All
Address Type
Selection
Selects an address type. Bit
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
Select Update Used Address on the context menu to display the

used addresses
Editing the program after Used Address is executed, does not update
the content of the Used Address automatically. If you want to see the
Used Address of edited program, select Update Used Address
again.

Honeywell
307
8. Programming
8.2. Used Address
View Address Uses

Double-click the cell where the used I/O figures are displayed, or click View Address
Uses on the context menu.
Field Label
308
Description
PLC
Used to display the PLC name with the applicable

Address used.
Address used
It is the Address that the View Address Uses dialog

box shows.
Program
Displays the program name with the applicable Address

used
Address
Displays the address used in the program.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
8.2. Used Address
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Type
Displays the address type used in the program.
IN/OUT
Displays whether the address is used as Input or

Output.
Instruction
Displays the instruction type of operand for which the

applicable address is used. (Displayed as identical as
the instruction tool bar of LD editor).
Position
Displays the position in the program.
Comment
Displays the comment of a selected address.
Go To
The function going to the program using the address of

a selected line.

Honeywell
309
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
8.3
Check Program
This function is used to check the prepared LD program for errors. The following items
are checked.
Logic Error: checks for LD connection errors.
Grammar Error: checks for grammatical errors used in SBRT/CALL,

FOR/NEXT, etc.
Duplicated Coil Error: checks for errors if duplicate output items are used.
Check Program Setting

To check a program setting:
Step
1
Action
Select View > Check Program.
Field Label
310

Honeywell
Description
R200
11/09
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
Step
Action
Logic Error
Used to check for programs logic errors such

as LD connection errors and short circuit.
Grammar Error
Used to check for errors in the application

instructions such as CALL/SBRT,
MCS/MCSCLR, etc.
Unreferenced label
Used to specify the processing range of the

declared label which was not used. Ignore,
Warning or Error can be selected.
Unreferenced
subroutine
Used to specify the processing range of the

declared subroutine which was not used.
Ignore, Warning or Error can be selected.
Duplicated coil error
Used to check for the Duplicated Coil error.
Strict check on data

type
Used to select Error or Warning for the

Duplicated Coil.
Check program size
Displays program size when checking.
Report unused
variables
Displays unused variables when checking.
Current program
(modbus)
Used to check the current program only.
All programs
Used to check all the programs listed on the

current PLC item.
ATTENTION
Ignore: used to ignore errors.
Warning: If any error occurs, a Warning is displayed on the Result

Window and writing a program on PLC is available.
Error: If any error occurs, Error is displayed on the Result Window and
writing a program on PLC is unavailable.
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
For additional details on Logic Error and Grammar Error, see

sections on Logic Error and Grammar Error.
Honeywell
311
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
If the current program only is selected while one or more programs

are listed on the current PLC item, CALL/SBRT is not checked.
When writing a program on the PLC, all the items except the
Duplicated Coil are always checked even if it is not specified by the
user.
In the 2MLI series of PLC, many programs can be added to the PLC
item and the SBRT call is available between programs.
Field Label
Checking Address
312
Description
Sets the address and variable area to check.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
Specification
Checking Option
Designates whether to check duplicated coil for a

function (block) output.
OK
Applies the setting and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
Set coil (-(S)-) and Reset coil (-(R)-) are not checked for Duplicate
Coil.
In the Function (block) output check, the range is determined by the

parameter type.

Honeywell
313
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
Check Result Trace

If any error occurs on the program, its details are displayed on the Program Inspect tab of
the message window. Double-click the error details to move to the location where the
error occurs.
314

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
Logic Error
It is used to check for any logic error, and display its details and location.
1.
L0000: Input or output is not connected. This error occurs if the contact point is not
connected with the power line.
Action: Correct the LD program to prevent an input-output disconnect.
2.
L0100: It is a short circuit. This error occurs if the area connected with the OR is
connected with the horizontal line without the contact point.
Action: Delete OR if the OR connection is not necessary any more, or enter the contact
point in the applicable location.
3.
L0200: Address or variable is not input. This error occurs if the address or variable
is not input in the contact point or coil.
Action: Input a proper address in the contact point or coil where the error occurs.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
315
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
4.
L0300: OR-LOAD incorrectly connected. This error occurs if OR-LOAD

connected incorrectly.
Action: Search for OR-LOAD incorrectly connected and then correct the LD program.
5.
316
L0400: Specified number of contact points is exceeded. This error occurs if the
number of continuous LOAD instructions exceeds 32.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
Action: Correct the LD program to limit the LOAD instructions within 32.
6.
L0401: Incorrect input. This error occurs if the input necessary is nonexistent.
Action: Add the necessary input to the input terminal.
7.
L0402: Incorrect input. This error occurs if the input unnecessary is existent.
Action: Delete the input unnecessary from the input terminal.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
317
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
8.
L0404: The maximum number of MPUSH exceeded. This error occurs if the
number of continuous MPUSH/MPOP exceeds 16.
Action: Correct the LD program to limit the continuous MPUSH/MPOP to 16.

9.
318
L0406: Application instruction in error. This error occurs if the application

instruction is not existent in the 2MLI series PLC is used.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
Action: Replace the instruction with the one provided by the 2MLI series of PLC.
ATTENTION
This error occurs if GMWIN series PLC project file is converted to 2MLI
project.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
319
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
Grammar Error
This function is used to check for grammar-related errors generated when an application
instruction is used.
1.
E1001: Label declared as duplicated. This error occurs if duplicated LABEL used.
Action: Delete the duplicated label, or change the name of the label.
E1002: Label Label Namenonexistent. This error occurs if JMP is used to refer to
the nonexistent label.
Action: Add the label where the error occurs, or correct the JMP instruction which uses
the label.
E1003: Label Label Name not used. This error occurs if the JMP instruction is not
used in the program.
Action: Delete the label, or add the application JMP instruction.

320

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
E1004: Label Label Name not used in the subroutine. This error occurs if the JMP
instruction is not used in the program.
Action: Delete the label in the subroutine, or add the application JMP instruction.
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
The error number E1003/E1004 occurs only when Warning or Error

is selected for the label not referred to in the Grammar Error not
selected in the View > Check Program option. For additional
information, see section on Check Program.

Honeywell
321
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
E1005: Label Label Name nonexistent in the subroutine. This error occurs if the
JMP instruction uses the label nonexistent in the subroutine.
Action: Add the label in the subroutine, or correct the JMP instruction.
E2001: Return instruction nonexistent in the subroutine Subroutine Name. The

subroutine is finished with the RET instruction.
Action: Add the RET instruction in the subroutine block.
322

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
E2010: Subroutine call nonexistent. The call of nonexistent SBRT causes an error.
Action: Add the SBRT~RET blocks of the subroutine name to call.
R200
11/09
E2003: Subroutine 'Subroutine Name' is positioned prior to END instruction. SBRT

and RET positioned prior to END instruction cause an error.

Honeywell
323
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
Action: Move the application instructions SBRT and RET to the position after the End
instruction.
E2011: Subroutine not used. Although SBRT~RET blocks exist, no CALL

instruction is available to use the applicable subroutine.
Action: Delete the subroutine not being used, or add the CALL instruction.
324

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
ATTENTION
The error number E2011 occurs only when Warning or Error is

selected for the subroutine not referred to in the Grammar Error
Inspect item. For additional information, see section on Check
Program.
E2012: Subroutine declared as duplicated. Subroutine Name- An identical name of

the subroutine cannot be used.
Action: Change the duplicated name of the subroutine.
E2014: The maximum number of subroutines exceeded. Based on the PLC type, the
maximum number of subroutines is exceeded.
Action: Check the number of the subroutines used.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
325
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
ATTENTION
The maximum number of subroutines usable depends on the PLC

type. Refer to 2MLI CPU manual for details.
E3001: Equal number of NEXT unavailable. If the number FOR/NEXT instructions

are not equal, it causes this error.
Action: Let the number of FOR instructions and NEXT instructions be the same.
E3002: Equal number of FOR unavailable. If the number FOR/NEXT instructions

are not equal, it causes this error.
Action: Let the number of FOR instructions and NEXT instructions identical.
326

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
E3003: FOR-NEXT cannot be nested more than 16 times. FOR/NEXT can be

duplicated up to 16 blocks. If the number of the duplicated FOR/NEXT blocks
exceeds 16, it causes an error.
Action: Limit the number of the FOR / NEXT blocks not to exceed 16.
R200
11/09
E3004: Between FOR-NEXT, RET or END is not available. If RET or END is

included between FOR and NEXT, it causes an error.

Honeywell
327
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
Action: Change the location of the END and RET instruction positioned between
FOR/NEXT blocks.
E3005: BREAK singly used. BREAK instruction can be used only between
FOR/NEXT blocks.
Action: Change the location of BREAK instruction.
328
00002: needs one and more scan program. There is no scan program in the current
PLC item, which causes an error.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
Action: Add an applicable program item to the Project Scan Program.
00003: There is no program to check There is no program in the current PLC item.
Action: Add a scan program and try again.
E1300: An element (instruction) not available in UDF (User Defined Function).
Action: The function block and positive (negative) transition pulse contact point (coil)
are not available in UDF.
ATTENTION
The elements cannot be inserted in UDF Edit but they can be

inserted by using Paste and other functions in other programs.
E1310: The return value needs at least, one or more outputs.
Action: The VAR_RETURN type variable is not designated in UDF, which causes an
error. Check whether the variable is used in the program.
R200
11/09
E1400: needs the TRANS output.

Honeywell
329
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
Action: TRANS variable is not designated as the output in the SFC Transition Program
created by LD, which causes an error. Check whether the variable is used as output in the
program.
E5000: Needs one or more INIT_DONE instruction to end the initialization task.
Action: although the initialization task is added, the conditions to end the initialization
task are not designated. To normally end the scan program, the conditions to end the
initialization task must be designated.
L0700: Undeclared variable
Action: the variable used as the IO parameter of contact point, coil and function (Block)
is not declared. Check whether the variable is declared in the local variable.
L0701: Input unsuitable data type.
Action: the type of used address or variable is not suitable. Check the type of used
address or variable.
L0702: Invalid input connection
Action: The line connection of function (block) is only available for BOOL type. The
input here needs a non-BOOL type input.
L0703: Function (block) cannot have more than one input line.
Action: Check the connection to ensure that the Function (block) does not have more
than one input line.
330

Honeywell
R200
11/09
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
L0704: Invalid output connection
Action: The line connection of function (block) is only available for BOOL type. Since
line cannot be connected to other type but BOOL, check the line output.
L0705: Function (block) must not have more than one output line.
Action: Function (block) must not have more than one output line. Check the line
connection.
L0706: Incorrect function IO type
Action: In case of the function (block) having ANY type as the IO parameter, the data
type of IO parameter indicated as ANY type must be the same. Check the data type of the
input IO parameter.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
331
8. Programming
8.3. Check Program
ATTENTION
If the strict data type check is not set in the program check options, it
checks the only IO parameter size of function (block).
L0707: The size of array is not same.
Action: The size of array used in MOVE function as the IO parameter must be same.
L0708: Unknown function.
Action: Unavailable function. Check whether the function is user-defined function.
L0709: Instance name is omitted.
Action: The instance name is omitted in the function block. Check the input items.
L0710: Instance type is not the same.
Action: The instance type of function block is not identical with the function block.
Check the input items.
L0711: Undeclared instance
Action: The function block instance is not declared in the local variable. Declare the
function block instance in the local variable before use.
332

Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
9.1
Find Address
The Find/Replace function is used to find or change the address and the String in LD,
SFC and Variable/Comment of SoftMaster.
This function is used to find the address previously made in LD Editor, SFC Editor, or
Variable/Comment Editor.
To find an address, perform the following steps:
Step
1
Action
Click Find/Replace>Find Address on the menu.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Find what
Used to specify the address to find.
Include all subaddresses/variable

names
Used to select the address type containing the

address to find. Then, if selecting the
checkbox, it finds %IB0.1.0, %IW0.1.0,
%IL0.1.0 and others containing %IX0.1.1.
Output to pane 2
SoftMaster has two Find result windows. The

result is displayed in Find 1 result window, but
if the Output to pane 2 is selected, the result
is displayed in Find 2 result window.

Honeywell
333
9. Find/Replace
9.1. Find Address
Step
334
Action
Direction
Used to specify the location to find upward or

downward from the line currently selected in
the respective editor.
Range
Selects it to find by designating a specific line

after designating the direction. If Range is
selected, the start and end lines must be also
entered.
Find Next
Finds the detail specified above right in the

next to the line (position) currently selected. If
the applicable address is found, the position
the applicable address is located is selected.
Find All
Finds all the details specified above to display

the result on the find result window.
Advanced>>
It is only applicable in LD editor. Click

Advanced>> to expand and Advanced<< to
close the selection. It is used to find specific
contact point, specific coil and extended
function and function/function block used in LD
editor

Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
9.1. Find Address
Step
Action
ATTENTION
The result is displayed on the find window only with Find All run.
Since Find All finds all details in the applicable documents, it is

insignificant to select the direction.
Advanced>> is displayed only in Ladder editor.
Advanced>> (extension) is as shown in the following figure.
Find Next Address

It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable, Variable and Local Variable in
common.
Details of this function are described as follows, based on LD.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
335
9. Find/Replace
9.1. Find Address
To find the next address, perform the following steps:

Step
336
Action
Select the basic cell of the direction.
Select Find/Replace > Find Address.
Specify the address to find, the direction and the options.
Click Find Next. If address is found identical to the detail as specified on the
dialog box any, move to the address whose cell is identical.
Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
9.1. Find Address
Step
Action
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
If no address identical to the specified address is found, the following

message appears.
Find Next finds all the current programs based on the selected cell
when the address find dialog box is displayed. If the direction is set
Downward, it starts finding the address from the cell next to the
selected cell to the last cell of the program, and then from the starting
cell of the program.

Honeywell
337
9. Find/Replace
9.1. Find Address
Find All Address

It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable and Local Variable in common.
Details of this function are described below based on LD.
To find all addresses, perform the following steps:
Step
338
Action
Select Find/Replace > Find Address.
Specify the address to find, the direction and the options.
Click Find All. Find All yields its result on the find message window as in the
following figure.
On the find window, select the line to find and then click Enter to move the
cell to the line of the applicable LD program.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
9.1. Find Address
Step
Action
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
Find All finds the address in all the programs included in the current
PLC.

Honeywell
339
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find Text
9.2
Find Text
Finding text
This function is used to find the String of Rung Comment, Variable, Variable Comment,
Application Instruction and Label.
It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable, Variable and Local Variable. The
following description is based on LD.
To find text, perform the following steps:
Step
340
Action
Select Find/Replace > Find Text.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find Text
Step
Action
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Find what:
Used to specify the String to find.
Match whole word

only
Selecting All Identical finds the string only

exactly identical to the string specified in the
detail to find. If it is not selected, it also finds the
string where the detail to find is included.
Case-sensitive
Selecting this option finds the string exactly

identical to the string.
Output to pane 2
SoftMaster has two Find result windows. The

result is displayed in the Find 1 result window,
but if the Output to pane 2 is selected, the
result is displayed in Find 2 result window.
Direction

downward from the line currently selected in the
respective editor.
Find Next
Finds the detail specified above right in the next

to the line (position) currently selected. If the
applicable String is found, the position the
applicable String is located is selected.
Find All
Finds all the details specified to display the

result on the Find result window.
Range
If Range is selected, Find String is run in a

specific step. If Range is selected, the start and
last steps must be also entered.
Honeywell
341
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find Text
Step
Action
Advanced>>
342
It is only used in LD editor. Advanced>> and

Advanced<< is changed by click. It is used to
find specific contact point, specific coil and
application instruction used in LD editor.
Specify the String to find, the selection options and the direction.
Click Find Next. If a string identical to the specified detail is found on the
dialog box, it moves to the string whose cell is identical.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find Text
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
If no string identical to the specified string is found, the following

message appears.
Find Next finds the current programs based on the selected cell
when the String Find dialog box is displayed. If the direction is set
Downward, it begins finding the String from the cell next to the
selected cell to the last cell of the program, and then from the starting
cell of the program.

Honeywell
343
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find Text
ATTENTION
344
The result is displayed on the Find windows 1 or 2 only when Find All
is run.
Since Find All finds all details in the applicable documents, the
direction is not significant to select.
Advanced>> is displayed only in LD editor.
Advanced>> (extension) and Advanced<< (shrink) is as shown

below.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find Text
Find All String

It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable and Local Variable in common.
To find a particular string, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Find/Replace > Find String.
Specify the string to find, the selection options and the direction.
Click Find All. Find All displays the results on the find message window as in
the following figure.

Honeywell
345
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find Text
Step
Action
On the find window, select the line to find and then click Enter to move the
cell to the line of the applicable LD program.
ATTENTION
346
Find All finds the String in all the programs included in the current
PLC.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
9.3. Address Replacement
9.3
Address Replacement
Replace Address
This function is used to change the address previously made in LD Editor, IL Editor, or
Variable/Comment Editor.
It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment. This function is used to find
a previously created address. Details of this function are described as follows based on
LD.
To replace an address, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Find/Replace > Replace Address.
Specify the details to find and replace the type and the direction.

Honeywell
347
9. Find/Replace
Step
Action
Field Label
348
Description
Find what
Used to specify the address to find.
Replace with
Used to specify the address to replace.
Find including lower

type
If selecting the checkbox when finding the

address containing the address input in Find
With, it finds %IB0.1.0, %ID0.1.0, %IL0.1.0
and others including %IX0.1.1.
Replace with range
If checking Mass Change, the number of

address and the coverage to match the
change so that the addresses can be mass
changed.
Include Variable
Selects whether to replace the

variable/comment of the input address with the
variable/comment of the address to replace.
That is, select whether to replace with the
variable/comment of the address.
Range
Designates the number of address for mass

change. It is activated only when the Mass
Change checkbox is selected.
Area
Selects whether to contain by address types. If

mass changing %IL0.0.1, for instance, they
can be mass changed by selecting bit, byte,
word and double word less than L area
respectively.
Direction

downward from the line currently selected in
the corresponding editor.
Range
If selecting Range, Address Change can be

run within a specific line. If selecting Range,
the start and last lines must be also entered.
Find Next
Finds the detail specified above right in the

next to the line (position) currently selected. If
the applicable address is found, the position
the applicable address is located is selected.
Replace
Replaces the address as specified above

based on the currently selected position (line).
Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Replace All
Replaces all the details specified above after

found.
Advanced>>
It is only used in Ladder editor. Advanced>>

and Advanced<< is changed by click. It is
used to find specific contact point, specific coil
and extended function/function block used in
Ladder editor.
Click Replace. The selected cell is replaced with the address specified for
replacement.

Honeywell
349
9. Find/Replace
ATTENTION
Replace finds all the current programs based on the selected cell
when the address Replace dialog box is displayed. If the direction is
set downward, it starts to find the address identical from the cell
selected to the last of the programs, and then the address identical
again from the first of the programs to the basic cell.
The direction need not be selected in case of Replace All.
If Replace with range is selected, Replace All only is available.
Advanced>> is displayed only in LD editor
Message box is same as described in the Find Address section when

Advanced is used.
Replace All Addresses

It is used for the LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor. This is used to find
the previously created address.
Replacing All Addresses
To replace all addresses, perform the following steps:
Step
350
Action
Specify the details to find and Replace the type and the direction.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Click Replace All.
On completion of the Replace All in the current program, the following

message box appears.

Honeywell
351
9. Find/Replace
Replace with range

It is used to change consecutive addresses in bulk. For example, the addresses of %MX1
~ %MX10 can be changed to %MX100 ~ %MX109.
Ex) if the detail to fine is %MX1, the detail to change is %MX100 and the number of
address is 10,
To replace the number of addresses with a range, perform the following steps:
Step
352
Action
Specify the details to Find and Replace the type and the direction, check the
Range Replace box and then enter the number of addresses to Replace with
range.
Click Replace All.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
Replace with range is available only for the addresses, not for the
constants.

Honeywell
353
9. Find/Replace
9.4. Text Replacement
9.4
Text Replacement
Replace text string

This function is used to find and replace the text string of Comment, Variable, etc. except
the address.
It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor in common. It is used
to find the previously created addresses. Details of this function are described as follows
based on the LD.
ATTENTION
Advanced>> is displayed only in Ladder editor
354

Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
To replace a string, perform the following steps:

Step
Action
On the menu, select Find/Replace > Replace String.
Specify the String to find and replace the selection options and the direction.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Replace With
Used to specify the string to find.
Find What
Used to specify the string to replace.
Match whole word

only
If Match whole word only is selected, it finds

the string exactly identical to the string specified.
Case-sensitive
If this selected, it finds the string only exactly

identical to the string with Case-sensitive
characters sorted out. If not selected, it finds the
string in characters not sorted out.
Include variable
If this selected, the variable is also replaced as

applicable when the string is replaced. If this is
not selected, the variable is not included in the
replace when the string is replaced.
Direction

downward from the line currently selected in the
Honeywell
355
9. Find/Replace
Step
Action
respective editor.
356
Range
If selecting a range, Replace String can be run

within a specific line. If Range is selected, the
first and last steps must be entered.
Find Next
Finds the detail specified above right in the next

to the line (position) currently selected. If the
applicable string is found, the cell moves to the
position the applicable string is located.
Replace
Replaces the detail specified above after found.
Replace All
Replaces all the details specified have been

found.
Advanced>>
It is only used in Ladder editor. Advanced>> and

Advanced<< is changed by click. It is used to
find specific contact point, specific coil, extended
function, function/function block used in Ladder
editor.
Click Replace. The selected string is replaced with the string specified for
replacement.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
ATTENTION
Replace is available only when the string of the cell currently

selected is identical to the detail to find as specified on the dialog
box.
Click Replace to move to the next cell identical to the detail to find as
specified on the dialog box regardless of the execution of Replace.
Replace find all the current programs based on the selected cell
when the address Replace dialog box is displayed.
when the address Replace dialog box is displayed. If the direction is
set downward, it starts to find the address identical from the cell
selected to the last of the programs, and then the address identical
again from the first of the programs to the basic cell.
when the Replace String dialog box is displayed. If the direction is set
downward, it starts to find the string identical from the cell selected to
the last of the programs, and then again from the first of the programs
to the basic cell.
Replace All String

It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor. It is used to find the
previously created address.
To replace all strings, perform the following steps:
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
Select Find/Replace > Replace String.

Honeywell
357
9. Find/Replace
Step
358
Action
Specify the details to Find and Replace the selection options and the
direction.
Click Replace All.
If Replace All is complete in the current program, the following message box
appears for you to decide to Replace in the other programs.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
9. Find/Replace
Step
R200
11/09
Action

Honeywell
359
9. Find/Replace
9.5. Find Again
9.5
Find Again
Find Again is used to find the details of Find Address or Find String again if once run
previously. If Find was not run previously, it is inactive.
360
Select Find/Replace > Find Again.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
10.1 Basic Parameter
Basic Parameter Setting
It is used to specify the basic parameters related with the PLC operation.
To access Basic Parameter settings:
Step
1
Action
On the project tree, double-click Parameter > Basic Parameters.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Basic Operation
Settings
: used to specify setting of basic operation,

time, restart method and output control of [Basic
Parameters] information
Fixed period
operation
: used to decide to run the PLC program based

on the fixed period operation or based on the
scan time.
Fixed period
operation time
setting
If (b) Fixed period operation above is checked,

enter the operation time in ms unit.

Honeywell
361
10. Parameters
10.1. Basic Parameter
Step
362
Action
Watch Dog timer
Used to specify the time value of the scan

watch-dog timer to keep PLC from stopping due
to program error.
Standard input filter
Used to specify the standard input value. For

more details, refer section on Detailed Module
Information Setting.
Restart mode
Sets the restart mode. Select either cold or

warm restart.
Output during
debugging
Used to decide to output the data to the output

module as usual or not even while being
debugged.
Keep Output when

an error occurs
Used to decide to output the data to the module

as usual or not even when an error or a specific
input occurs.
Keep Output when

converting RUN>STOP

as usual or not even when PLC operation mode
changes from RUN to STOP.
Keep Output when

STOP->RUN

as usual or not even when PLC operation mode
changes from STOP to RUN.
Delete all areas

except latch when an
error occurs
Used to decide to delete the memory area with

no latch specified in case an error occurs during
RUN.
Device Area setup tab: used to specify the area to preserve (latch area) of
[Basic Parameters] information even when PLC power is off.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
Step
Action
Field Label
Select latch area
Description
Used to specify data area to preserve. It is the
representative flag to control area 1 and area 2
of the right latch area table. If the check box is
not selected, value specified in the right latch
area table will be ignored.
It is used to specify desired latch area for each
device, to decide to use the respective device
and to select the area. Area 1 and area 2
cannot be used as overlapped, and the
maximum size of each latch area is the
maximum size of the device area.
Timer boundary
R200
11/09
Timer areas are divided into 100ms, 10ms,

1ms and 0.1ms. This area can be selected as
the latch area within the specified value of the
left timer limit area. Like other devices the
areas cannot be set as overwritten. The
number of timers to use can be adjusted, and
the value specified will have a great influence
on the timer of LD diagram or IL program.
Default for setting value of each timer is as
follows;

Honeywell
363
10. Parameters
Step
Action
T100ms Start: 0
End: 999
T10ms
Start: 1000
End: 1499
T1ms
Start: 1500
End: 1999
T0.1ms
Start: 2000
End: 2047
When the timer limit specified is the default,

the timer will be automatically in 100ms unit
with T100 if used in LD diagram. It is because
T100 is in the area of T100ms. In order to use
the timer with a cycle of 10ms in basic setting,
optional address among T1000 ~ T1499 needs
to be used. You can specify the timer area of
each cycle to assign more memory areas to
the cycle desired to apply more.
In timer limit setting, different cycles can be set
as overlapped. In addition, since Start and End
of the area are always 0 and 2047 fixed, their
modification is unavailable. Each cycle needs
to be used with its size divided in this area.
5
364
Error Operation Setup tab: Specifies the operation method when an error
occurs on the PLC.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
Step
Action
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Continue running
when an arithmetic
error occurs
If this option is selected, the PLC runs even if

an arithmetic error occurs during PLC RUN.
Continue running
when a floating point
error occurs
If this option is selected, the PLC runs even if a

floating decimal point error occurs during PLC
RUN.
Continue running
when a fuse error
occurs

an error occurs on the fuse connection status of
the module during PLC RUN.
Continue running
when an I/O module
error occurs

an error occurs on an I/O module during PLC
RUN.
Continue running
when a special module
error occurs

an error occurs on the special module during
PLC RUN.
Continue running
when a communication
module error occurs

an error occurs on the communication module.
MODBUS Setup tab: Specifies MODBUS basic information among [Basic

Parameters] information

Honeywell
365
10. Parameters
Step
Action
Field Label
366
Description
Station number
Specifies the station Number used for MODBUS

communication. 0~63 is available for the range.
Data BIT
Changes the number of data bits used for each

String received. It is set identical to the value
specified in the PLC communicating with the user.
Most data is transferred in 7 or 8 data bits.
Stop BIT
Changes the time (if time is measured in bit)

required to transfer each String.
Baud rate
The maximum speed of the data to transfer

through this port is specified in bps (bit/sec). The
maximum speed is normally specified as much as
supported by the communicating computer or
device.
Parity BIT
Specifies the parity bit.
Serial mode
Specify the transference mode. ASCII

communication and RTU communication are
available.
Digital Input start

address
Used to specify the start address of DI (Digital

Input) memory area to read through MODBUS,

Honeywell
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
Step
Action
where the value should be specified in Word unit.
Digital Output start
address
Used to specify the start address of DO (Digital

Output) memory area to read through MODBUS,
Analog Input start

address
Used to specify the start address of AI (Analog

Input) memory area to read through MODBUS,
Analog Output
start address
Used to specify the start address of AO (Analog

Output) memory area to read through MODBUS,
TIP
Configure the Snet module before configuring the Modbus Server
or client in serial mode.
Configure the FEnet module before configuring the Modbus Server
or client in TCP mode.
The above settings are accomplished on an extra port in the CPU
which is exclusively for Modbus Server in the Serial Mode which
eliminates the need for using extra Snet or FEnet module. Refer to
the 2MLI CPUU manual to check whether your CPU supports this
additional option.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
367
10. Parameters
ATTENTION
Restart Mode
Restart mode is used to define the restart method of CPU when a Restart
command is issued to the CPU.
Cold Restart
To initiate a cold restart, set the restart mode as cold restart.

All data is cleared and the initial value of variables is set to zero.
Even though the parameter is set to warm restart mode, it starts in cold
restart mode when it is run just after the program is changed.
Pressing RESET switch during operation (same with online reset instruction),
starts in the cold restart mode, regardless of the restart mode set in the
parameter.
1.
It is run when setting the restart mode of parameter as warm restart.
2.
In case of a warm restart, the following happen:
3.
368
Warm Restart
The data set to remain the previous value remain the previous value.
The data set only with the initial value are set with the initial values.
All other data is cleared to 0.
If data is abnormal although the parameter is set in the warm restart

(data preservation against interruption is not available), it is run in the
cold restart mode.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O Parameters
10.2 I/O Parameters

Setting I/O parameters
It is used to specify the I/O type configured in the PLC slot and to set the applicable
parameters for each slot.
To access I/O Parameters settings:
Step
1
Action
On the project tree, select Parameter > I/O Parameters.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
All Base
Displays base module information and module

information per slot. In case module is not
designated in slot, its displayed as Default.
Set Base
Displays the already set base.
Module List
Displays the base module information and the

module information based on slots. If no module
is configured in the slot
Slot Information
Edits or displays bases module type for each

slot
Delete Slot
Deletes all information of the currently selected

slot.
Delete Base
Deletes all information of the currently selected

Honeywell
369
10. Parameters
Step
Action
base.
Base Setting
Sets base number of currently selected base.
Delete All
Deletes the configured module and information

of all bases.
Details
Displays detailed module information.
Print
Prints the module type and the modules

parameter information specified in the slot.
OK
Applies the changed items and closes the dialog

box.
Cancel
ATTENTION
370
The 2MLI project type supports the fixed allocation type only.
Therefore, the allocation information column is always displayed as
disabled.
Fixed point assignment and variable point assignment are available

for the module assignment method. The fixed point assignment
assigns 64 points collectively to a slot while the variable point
assignment depends on the module type. Exceptionally 32 points is
assigned to the special/communication module, and 16 points to the
empty slot.
The table below shows the differences between variable assignment

and fixed assignment, based on the basic base.
Slot
Module Name
Variable Assignment
16-point Input
P00000 ~ P0000F
P00000 ~ P0003F
16-point
Output
P00010 ~ P0001F
P00040 ~ P0007F
A/D Module
P00020 ~ P0002F
P00080 ~ P0011F
Communicatio
n Module
P00030 ~ P0003F
P00120 ~ P0015F
16-point
P00050 ~ P0005F
P00200 ~ P0023F

Honeywell
Fixed Assignment
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
Output
For additional information on the communication module information setting,
see SoftMaster-NM manual.
For additional information on the positioning module, see APM Users Guide.
Base Module Setup

Setting the information for a Base Module
It is used to specify the base information about a module.
To set the Base Module Information, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select the base module to specify from the address list (Base 00 to base 07).
Right click and select Base Setting. Or click the Base Setting.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Slot
Used to enter the maximum number of slots in

the base.
OK
Applies the changed items and closes the dialog

box.
Cancel

Honeywell
371
10. Parameters
ATTENTION
If the specified number of slots is less than the maximum number of

slots, the remaining area is not unavailable for editing.
Delete Base Module

To delete the Base Module Information, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select the base module to delete from the address list.
Right click the mouse and select Delete Base.
You are prompted to confirm the deletion. Click OK to delete the information
of the applicable base module.
Module Information Setting Based on Slots

Module type and detailed module information is described based on slots.
To set the module information settings based on slots:
Step
Action
Select the slot to specify the module in the slot information.
Select the arrow of the Module to display the module selection box. Or Right
click the mouse and select Edit.
This is applicable only when a module is already configured in the slot.
372

Honeywell
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
Step
Action
Click the selection box to select the module.
Select the description column and then right click to select Edit. And enter
the description for the applicable slot.
ATTENTION
The module description can contain a maximum of 128 English characters.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
373
10. Parameters
I/O Parameter Edit Function

Data editing details of Copy, Cut and Paste, based on slots is described as follows:
Copy/Paste
To copy and paste a selected slot, perform the following steps:
Step
374
Action
Select the slot to copy.
Right click the module and select Copy.
Select the slot to paste.
Right click to select Paste.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
Step
Action
Cut/Paste
To cut and paste a selected slot, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select the slot to cut.
Right-click to select Cut.
Select the slot to paste.
Right-click to select Paste.
Undo
To undo a particular action, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the slot to delete.
Right-click and select Delete.

Honeywell
375
10. Parameters
Step
Action
Right-click to select Undo.
ATTENTION
A maximum of 20 last actions can be revoked using the Undo feature.
Redo
To redo a particular action:
376
Right-click the mouse and select Redo.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
ATTENTION
A maximum of 20 actions can be revoked or invoked using the Undo

and Redo functions.
The shortcut keys used in I/O Parameters Edit cannot be used as the
user defined shortcut key specified in SoftMaster.
Click the mouse once on a slot to selects one slot. To select multiple
slots, click the mouse on a slot and drag it down to multiple slots.
Detailed Module Information Setting

Double-click or click Details to view the detailed module information setting.
Input module setting
For input module setting, perform the following steps:
R200
11/09
Step
Action
Double-click on I/O Parameters on the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting

dialog box is displayed.
Double-click an input module. The following dialog box is displayed

Honeywell
377
10. Parameters
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Filter
Used to specify the filter constant value for

the input.
OK
Applies the specified details and closes the

dialog box.
Cancel
Click OK to apply the setting
ATTENTION
378
Digital module with the input of AC cannot specify the filter value.
Standard value of the input filter is specified in basic parameters. For

details on the Basic Parameters, refer to section on Basic
Parameters.
The input filter used for checking the input signal does not change for
the filtering time. The following figure is with the input filter value of
3ms. As the input signal is the same for 3ms from the moment
detected, it is processed as normal input signal after 3ms.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
Output module
For input module setting, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Double-click I/O Parameters on the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting

Double-click an output module. The following dialog box is displayed.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Channel
One channel is assigned for 8 points, and the

emergent output mode can be specified per
channel.
OK

dialog box.
Cancel

Honeywell
379
10. Parameters
ATTENTION
Emergency output value is specified when the CPU is abruptly

stopped during RUN.
Default for the emergency output is Hold.
Module Reservation
It assigns the points of module only without any specific module specified. 16, 32 and 64
points are available for the assignment.
A/I Module
On the I/O Parameter Setting Dialog box, select A/I module and then click Details to
display the Parameter Setting Dialog box as follows.
For A/I module setting, perform the following steps:
Step
Action

Double click an A/I module. The following dialog box is displayed
Field Label
380
Description
All Parameters Settings
If this is selected, changing the parameter

item value, changes all the channels
applicable parameter values.
Maximum/Minimum
Value Display
As for the parameter item to input figures, if

the user inputs data, an applicable range is
displayed on the bottom of the dialog box
automatically. If the user changes the
parameter value to any other value than the

Honeywell
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
Step
Action
default, the String color changes from Black
to Blue.
OK

dialog box.
Cancel

Parameter
Channels
Input Range
Output Type
Setting Items
Default
Disable/Enable
Disable
1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/10~10V (Voltage Type)
1~5V
4~20mA
4~20mA/0~20mA
(Current Type)
0~16000/8000~8000/10005000/0~10000%
0~16000
(Input range changes

based on items)
Filter Process
Disable/Enable
Disable
Filter Constants
1-99
Average Process
Disable/Enable
Disable
Average Method
Count Average/Time
Average
Count Average
Average Value
Count Average 2-64000,

Time Average 4-16000
Analog output module

On the I/O Parameters Setting dialog box, select A/O module and then click Details to
display the Parameters Setting dialog box and set the details.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
381
10. Parameters
For A/O module setting, perform the following steps:

Step
Action

Double click an A/O module. The following dialog box is displayed
Field Label
All Parameters Settings
If this is selected, changing the parameter

item value, changes all the channels
applicable parameter values. If the user
changes the parameter value to any other
value than the default, the String color
changes from Black to Blue.
OK

dialog box.
Cancel
Parameter
Channels
Output Range
Input Type
382
Description
Setting Items
Default
STOP/RUN
STOP
1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/10~10V (Voltage Type)
1~5V
4~20mA
4~20mA/0~20mA
(Current Type)
0~16000/8000~8000/1000SoftMaster User's Guide
Honeywell
0~16000
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
Parameter
Setting Items
Default
5000/0~10000%
(changed based on output
range)
Channel Output Type
Previous/minimum/middle
/maximum Value
Previous Value
High-speed Counter Module

On the I/O Parameters Setting Dialog box, select High Speed counter module and then
click Details to display the Parameters Setting dialog box.
For High-speed Counter module setting, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action

Double-click a high speed counter module. The following dialog box is

displayed.

Honeywell
383
10. Parameters
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Parameter Area
Displays the parameter item. And if the user

changes the parameter value other than the
default
Maximum/Minimum
value Display
When entering a numerical value for a

parameter
OK

dialog box.
Cancel
Parameter
Counter Mode
Setting Items
Linear Counter/Ring Counter
Default
Linear Counter
2-phase 1-multiplier/2-phase
2-multiplier/
2-phase 4-multiplier/CWCCW/
Pulse Input Mode
1-phase 1-input 1-multiplier/

1-phase 1-input 2-multiplier/
2-phase
1-multiplier
1-phase 2-input 1multiplier/1-phase 2-input 2multiplier

N/A/Count clear/Count latch/
Additional Function Mode
Sampling count/Measure
input frequency /
N/A
Measure rotations per unit

time/Count Disable
384
Range Value [msec]
0-60000
Compared Output 0 Mode
(Single Compare)
less/(Single Compare) less
(Single Compare)

Honeywell
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
Parameter
Setting Items
or equal/
Default
less
(Single Compare) equal/(Single

Compare) equal or greater/
(Single Compare)
greater/(Section Compare)
included/ (Section
Compare)excluded
Compared Output 1 Mode
As identical as specified
above
(Single Compare)
Preset Input Value
-2147483648-2147483647
Ring Counter, Minimum

Value
-2147483648-2147483647
Ring Counter, Maximum

Value
-2147483648-2147483647
Compared Output 0
Minimum Setting Value
-2147483648-2147483647
Compared Output 0
Maximum Setting Value
-2147483648-2147483647
Compared Output 1
Minimum Setting Value
-2147483648-2147483647
Compared Output 1
Maximum Setting Value
-2147483648-2147483647
Number of Pulses per

Rotation
0-60000
Frequency Display mode
1Hz/10Hz/100Hz/1000Hz
1Hz
less
HS Counter Parameter Items

ATTENTION
Pulse/Rev value item among High-speed counter parameter items is active
when the Auxiliary Mode is set to Revolution/Unit time.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
385
10. Parameters
For additional information on the communication module, see SoftMaster NM
Manual.
For additional information on the positioning module, see the APM manual.
I/O Parameter Print Function

This function is used for printing the specified I/O parameter and detailed module
information specified.
Print Option Setting
To print the specified I/O parameter:
On I/O Parameter Setting dialog box, select Print > Print.
a)
386
Print All: Prints all I/O configuration table and detailed module information.
Honeywell
R200
11/09
10. Parameters
b)
I/O Configuration Table: Prints I/O parameter's module setting details based
on slots, description and I/O information assigned.
c)
Detailed Info of Each Module: Prints the detailed module information for the
specified slot module.
Print Preview
To view the Print Preview, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the I/O Parameter Setting dialog box, select Print > Print.
On the Print dialog box, click Preview.
Copy to Clipboard
It is used for printing the I/O parameter table to the clipboard, thus to add onto the String
editor, word processor or spread sheet.
To copy the data to windows clipboard:
On the I/O Parameter dialog box, select Print > copy to Clipboard.
ATTENTION
Only I/O configuration table can be copied to clipboard.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
387
10. Parameters
388

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
11.1 Connection Options for the PLC
It is used to specify the connection network with the PLC.
Local Connection Setting
RS-232C or USB connection is available for Local Connect Setting.
Select Online > Connection Settings.
Field
R200
11/09
Description
Type
Used to specify communication media (RS-232C, USB, Ethernet and

Modem) to connect to the PLC.
Depth
Used to specify the connection configuration (Remote 1 and Remote

2) with PLC.
Connect
Clicking Connect attempts to connect to PLC using the specified

options.
Settings
Allows detailed setting based on the selected Connection Type.

Honeywell
389
11. Online
11.1. Connection Options for the PLC
Field
Description
Preview
Used to see a graphical preview of all Connect Options.
Timeout
interval
Time-out defines the time after which the attempt to establish

communication with the PLC is given up.
Retrial
times
Defines the number of times to retry connecting to the PLC if

communication connection fails.
Read/Write
data size in
PLC run
mode
Used to specify the frame size of data to transfer. This option is

available only when the PLC operation is in Run mode. In other modes
of operation, data is transferred in the maximum frame size.
Using the Local RS-232C

To connect through the local RS-232C, perform the following steps:
Step
390
Action
Select the Connection Type of RS-232C.
Click Setting to specify communication speed and communication COM port.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
Action
Click OK to save the Connection Options.
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
Default is RS-232C COM1 with the communication speed of

115200bps.
38400bps and 115200bps available for communication speed.
Communication speed is 115200bps for 2MLK Series.
Communication ports of COM1 ~ COM8 are available.
If USB serial device is used, a virtual COM port is applied to the

communication port. Check the device administrator to ensure the
specified port number.
Connection in SoftMaster and Connection in SoftMaster-NM, address

monitoring and system monitoring are available with one PLC at the
same time. However, it is the same Connect Options.

Honeywell
391
11. Online
Using the Local USB

To connect using the local USB, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select the Connection Type as USB.
USB has no detailed setting options. Hence Setting is disabled.
ATTENTION
USB device driver has to be installed for the USB to connect to the
PLC. Install the USB device driver before attempting to connect to the
PLC.
The USB driver is automatically installed along with SoftMaster. Refer

to section on SoftMaster Installation for details.
Remote 1 Connect Setting

Connecting using Ethernet
To set the connection to Ethernet, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select the Connection Type as Ethernet.
Click Setting to specify Ethernet IP.

Specify the IP address of the PLC CPU to be connected.
392

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
Action
ATTENTION
IP is as specified in Ethernet communication module.
The connection to PLC CPU can be tested using ping command from
PC.
Modem Connect
To connect using the Modem, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the Connection Type as Modem.
Click Setting to specify modem details as illustrated in the following figure.

Honeywell
393
11. Online
Step
Action
Field
Description
Modem Type
Enter the modem type available to connect. Snet

communication module has exclusive modem
functions.
Port number
Enter the modems communication port.
Baud rate
Enter the modems communication speed.
Phone number
Enter the phone number of the modem if it is a dialup modem.
Station number
Enter the station Number specified in the

communication module of Remote Step 1.
RS-232C or USB Remote Connect

To connect to RS-232C or USB remotely, perform the following steps:
Step
394
Action
Select the Connection Type as RS-232C/USB.
Select the Depth as Remote 1.
Click Settings and click the Remote 1 tab to specify Remote 1 settings.
Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
Action
Field
R200
11/09
Description
Network type
Used to specify PLC communication module type for

remote connection, Snet, FEnet and FDEnet are
available for the communication modules
Base number
Used to specify communication modules base

number of local PLC base.
Slot number
Used to specify communication modules slot number

of local PLC base.
Station number
Used to input communication modules specified

station Number of Remote 1.
IP address
Used to input communication modules specified IP

address of Remote 1.
Snet channel
Select the connection channel port if the

communication module of Remote.1 connection is
Snet module

Honeywell
395
11. Online
ATTENTION
Only if the network type is FEnet, the IP address is active. If not, IP

address is inactive with the Station number active
Base number of 0~7 and slot number of 0~15 is available.
Remote 2 Connect Setting
396
a)
Network type: used to specify PLC communication module type for remote
connection. Snet, FEnet and FDEnet are available for the communication
modules.
b)
Base number: used to specify communication modules base number of local

PLC base.
c)
Slot number: used to specify communication modules slot number of local

PLC base.
d)
Station number: used to input communication modules specified station

Number of Remote 1.
e)
IP address: used to input communication modules specified IP address of

Remote 1.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
11.2. Online Functions
11.2 Online Functions

Connect
This option is used to connect to the PLC based on the specified Connect Options.
To connect to a PLC using a specified connection option, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Online > Connect.
The following dialog appears while connecting.
If connected to the PLC, the Online menu and Online status is displayed.
If a password has been setup in the PLC, you are prompted to enter the
Password.
Connection is established if the input password matches the PLC password.

Honeywell
397
11. Online
ATTENTION
If the connection to the PLC is fast, the dialog box may appear and
disappear quickly while connecting.
After the connection has been established, the PLCs status is displayed
beside the project name on the project window and on the status display
line.
If any other application program is already connected to the PLC, its main Online
functions are not available.
398
After the PLC is connected, connecting its cable to another PLC

disconnects the previous PLC automatically.
When Disconnect is run, Monitor and Debug functions also end.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
ATTENTION
1.
Check Points when connection fails.
RS-232C
Check if RS-232C cable connection between Computer and PLC is

correct
Check if the COM ports number of the computer matches with the COM
port number where the cable is connected.
Check if the RS-232C cable connections are correct.
Check if the status of PLC is normal.
2.
USB
Check if the USB cable connection between the Computer and PLC is
correct
Check if the computer identified the PLC as an USB device during the
connection.
a)
Connect the computer and PLC with an USB cable.
For additional details, see section on Verifying the USB device driver
installation.
ATTENTION
a)
Click Start>Run.
b) Enter command in the Run dialog box
c) Run ping test for Ethernet module from the Command Prompt. Type
ping <IP address of CPU> and press Enter. If the Ethernet module
R200
11/09

Honeywell
399
11. Online
responds normally, the screen shows the communication status as in

the following figure. If the Ethernet module does not respond, the
screen displays the Time out message.
400
Check if the status of PLC is normal.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Write
It is used to transfer user programs, parameters and comments to the PLC.
To transfer user programs, parameters and comment to the PLC, perform the following
steps:
Step
Action
To connect to PLC via Online, select Online > Connect.
Select Online > Write.
Select the data to transfer to the PLC and then click OK to start transfer the
selected data to PLC.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Selection Tree
Selects the data to transfer to PLC.
OK
Starts to transfer the data to PLC if clicked.
Cancel
Cancels the writing of data.

Honeywell
401
11. Online
Step
Action
a)
Displays the current Write/Read item in progress.
b)
Displays the data size of the item (current items size/ all items size)
c)
Displays progressing rate of the current item.
d)
Displays progressing rate of all items.
e)
Displays progressing time elapsed until current.
f)
Cancel: Stops transferring the data.
ATTENTION
The special module parameter Write is available only when I/O

parameter Write is selected.
Parameter Write takes more time during CPU RUN than in CPU
STOP mode.
Read
It is used to transfer user programs, parameters and comments from the PLC to a current
project.
To upload the data in PLC and to apply them to a new project, perform the following
steps:
Step
402
Action
To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.
Select Online > Read.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
3
Action
Select items to upload from the PLC and click OK. The uploaded items are
applied to the current project.
A message is displayed to confirm that the reading is complete.
ATTENTION
Refer to the section on Write for the description of each Dialog.
Change Mode
It is used to convert the operation mode of the PLC in operation.
To change the PLC operation mode, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
To connect to the PLC, select Online > Connect.
Select Online > Change Mode > Run/Stop/Debug.
PLC operation mode changes as selected by the user.

Honeywell
403
11. Online
ATTENTION
Ensure that PLCs remote dip switch is ON with the operation mode
dip switch in Stop.
The program in the PLC must be same to that in the project to

convert to Debug mode.
If changed from Stop to Run mode, a dialog box confirms the

program conversion to an executable code inside the PLC. This
dialog box may be visible up to 30 seconds according to the program
size.
If changed to Run mode, the following dialog box appears while the
initialization task is run. After the initialization task is complete or
disconnected, the dialog box closes.
If changed to Run or Debug mode, Run or Debug function may not

be normal if any error occurs on the PLC. Delete the PLC error first
and then change the operation mode.
If Show Message when changing the PLC mode in the Tool >
Option > Online is not selected, the confirmation message is not
displayed when Mode Change instruction is run.
Compare with PLC

This function is used to compare the project in the PLC to the project open in SoftMaster.
To compare projects, perform the following steps:
Step
404
Action
Select Online > Compare with PLC.
Select an object to compare and then click Compare.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
Action
Field
Description
Current project
Refers to the project open in SoftMaster.
Compare
Compares between the selected items.
PLC
Refers to the project in the PLC.
ATTENTION
Compare results are displayed on the Result window.
Refer to section on Comparing Projects for details.
Reset PLC
This function is used to reset the PLC. Reset PLC is also possible using the Reset PLC
dip switch in the CPU module.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
405
11. Online
To reset the PLC, perform the following steps:

Step
Action
Select Online > Reset PLC.
Choose to perform a reset or an overall reset and click OK.
ATTENTION
406
Reset: when PLC is powered again, it deletes all error/warning

information to during power ON. Error/warning may occur again
based on the situation.
Overall reset: when PLC is powered again, it clears error/warning

information; latch 1 area data, I/O skip, error mask and forced I/O
setting area to allow power on.
Beware of the fact that after reset, the PLC is OFF and then ON
again.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Clearing PLC data

It is used to clear user programs, parameters, comments, memory and latch area in PLC.
To delete the saved data and latch area in PLC, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Online > Clear PLC.
Select items to delete and then click Clear to start Clear PLC.
Under the Clear Item tab, select items of the project saved in the PLC to be
deleted.
Click Clear to delete the selected items.
Select the Clear Memory tab to clear the selected memory area in the PLC.

Honeywell
407
11. Online
Step
Action
Field
408
Description
List of memory
areas to select
Shows the memory areas in PLC. Start/End

address to delete can be specified by the user.
Clear
Deleted the selected items.
Select All
Selects all the memory areas.
Reset All
Cancels the selected memory area.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
PLC Information
You can view the information regarding the connected PLC. You can also set the
password and the PLC timer on this dialog box.
CPU Information
This function allows checking the detailed information of the PLC CPU.
To check the detailed information of PLC CPU, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Online > PLC Information.
Select the CPU tab.
Shows the specified details and status of the connected PLC CPU.
4
R200
11/09
Click Close to close the dialog box.

Honeywell
409
11. Online
CPU Performance
SoftMaster enables you to check the scan time of the PLC and memory application
status.
To check the scan time and memory application status of PLC, perform the following
steps:
Step
Action
To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.
Click Online > PLC Information.
Select the Performance tab.
Field Label
Scan Time
410
Description
Shows the Maximum/Minimum/Current scan
time of the connected PLC. If Fixed Cycle
Operation is set in the basic parameter, it
displays the fixed cycle.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
Action
Program Memory
used
Shows the downloaded programs size/ all PLC

program areas size.
Details
Shows the list of programs downloaded on the

PLC.
Upload Memory used
Shows the downloaded comments size/ all PLC

comment areas size.
Details
Shows the list of comments saved in the PLC.
Click Details to view details of the Program Memory used.
The list of all saved programs and their size is displayed.
Password
User password can be specified, changed or deleted to protect PLC information.
To assign, change and delete the user password, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the Password tab.

Honeywell
411
11. Online
Step
Action
Field
Current Password
412
Description
Used to enter the password saved
in the PLC.
New password
Used to enter a new password.
Confirm password
Used to enter the New Password

again.
Delete
Deletes the password of the PLC.
Change
Changes the password of the PLC.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Setting password
To set a new password, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Enter a new password in New Password box.
Enter the new password again in the Confirm password box.
Click Change to set the new password in PLC.
Changing password
To change an existing password:
Step
Action
Enter the password saved in PLC in Current Password.
Enter a new password in New Password.
Enter the new password again in Confirm password.
Click Change to change the password of PLC.
Deleting password
To delete an existing password:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Enter the password saved in PLC in Current Password.
Click Clear to delete the PLC password.

Honeywell
413
11. Online
ATTENTION
The password can contain a maximum of eight alphabets. The

alphabets can be of upper case or lower case.
Special characters can also be used for password.
On setting a password for the PLC, you are prompted to supply

password when attempting to connect to the PLC. Only after
authentication of the password, the connection to the PLC is
established.
PLC RTC Setting

It helps to set the RTC (Real Time Clock) of the PLC.
To set the RTC of the PLC, perform the following steps:
Step
414
Action
Select the PLC RTC tab.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
Action
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
State
Shows PLC timer setting status. If the timer is

not specified, PLC time is not read.
Date
Displays date.
Time
Displays time.
Synchronize PLC
with PC clock
Synchronizes date and time between PC and

PLC.
Send to PLC
Transfers user specified time or synchronized

time to PLC.

Honeywell
415
11. Online
PLC History
It displays the history data of error/warning, Change Mode and Shut down Log saved in
PLC.
Error Log
To view the error log, perform the following steps:
Step
416
Action
Select Online > PLC History.
Select the Error Log tab on PLC History dialog box.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
List
Displays Error Log.
Details/Remedy
Displays details of the error selected from the

history along with action to rectify the error.
Read All
Reads and displays all PLC histories.
Clear all logs
Deletes all logs entered.
Update
Reads PLC history again.
Save
Saves PLC history to a file.
Clear
Deletes PLC history.
Close
Mode Log
It shows the Mode Change Log of PLC operation modes. To view the Mode log, perform
the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the Mode Log tab on PLC History dialog box.

Honeywell
417
11. Online
Step
Action
Shut down Log

It shows the Shut down Log history of PLC. To view the Shut down log, perform the
following steps:
Step
418
Action
Select the Shut Down Log tab on the PLC History dialog box.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
Action
ATTENTION
The shut down Log also displays the Base number where power shut down
occurred.
System Log
It shows the history of tasks run by SoftMaster when the PLC is running. To view the
System log, perform the following steps:
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
Honeywell
419
11. Online
Step
Action
Select the System Log tab on the PLC History dialog box.
ATTENTION
420
History data is arranged in chronological sequence.
The history is saved in a .csv file. This file can be open in MS Excel
or other String editing programs.
Double-click the first column of the list to change sequence in

ascending/descending order.
A maximum of 100 history data are displayed. Click Read All to read
more PLC histories. If the number of items in history is less than 100,
the Read All is disabled.
Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
PLC Error/Warning
You can check the error/warning and previous Error Log currently saved in PLC. To
check the error/warning and previous error logs in the PLC, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Online > PLC Errors/Warnings.

Honeywell
421
11. Online
ATTENTION
In case of an error/warning during connection or Online, the

Error/Warning dialog box appears.
If the error is an I/O parameter issue, I/O installation error, fuse error,
I/O Read/Write error, special communication module error, the
applicable errors slot information is displayed.
When a Program Error (when the PLC mode is changed from Stop
to Run) or Execution Program Error (when PLC is in Run mode)
occurs, if the SM project and the downloaded PLC program are
same, then double-click the area of program name to move to the
corresponding step in the program.
Flash Memory Setting

Flash memory operation of PLC can be configured using SoftMaster. When the operation
mode of the PLC mode changes to RUN, it runs the program after copying the program
in the flash memory to the program memory. In other words, it runs the PLC from the
program in the flash memory.
PLC operation in Run mode
PLC operation in RUN mode refers to the operation mode changes from STOP to RUN,
and that the operation mode is Run when PLC is powered back ON.
422

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
To view or change the flash memory settings, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Online > Set Flash Memory.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Enable flash memory run

mode
Program is run from Flash memory.
Disable flash memory run

mode
Cancels the flash memorys operation

mode.

Honeywell
423
11. Online
ATTENTION
424
If a flash memory operation mode is specified, the program is copied

to the flash memory after Program Write or Modification Write during
Run.
The flash memory operation mode setting is configured to recover the

program when PLC status is in error.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Force I/O Setting

Force I/O of the I/O refresh area can be specified in PLC. To specify a forced I/O and I/O
refresh area in PLC:
Step
1
Action
Select Online > Force I/O.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Module address
Used to select an address by using base, slot

selection box.
Forced Input
Used to enable/disable Forced Input. Forced

input value per bit is applicable only when the
Forced Input is allowed.
Honeywell
425
11. Online
Step
Action
Forced Output
Used to enable/disable Forced Output.

Forced output value per bit is applicable only
when the Forced Output is allowed.
Apply
Saves the changed items in the PLC without

closing the dialog box.
Forced I/O
Used to specify the flag and data for each bit.
Setting address list
Displays the address with the Forced I/O flag

or data specified.
Delete
Deletes the flag and data specified in the

selected address from the specified address
list.
Variable Names
Displays the list of variable/comment).
Delete All
Used to cancel the specified flag and data for

all areas.
Select All
Used to specify the flag and data for all

areas.
OK
Applies the changed items and closes the

dialog box.
Cancel
ATTENTION
426
Obtaining Forced I/O information, takes around 5 sec. at a speed of

115200bps with RS-232C connected, or about 1 sec. with USB.
The flag displays the Forced I/O application status for each bit. If the
flag is selected, it means Enable, and if the flag is not selected, it
means Disable.
The data displays the forced value. If selected, 1 is the forced value,
Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
and if not, 0 is the forced value. However, it is effective only when the
flag is in Enable status.
Flag
Data
Forced Value
0 (not selected)
0 (not selected)
0 (not selected)
1 (selected)
1 (selected)
0 (not selected)
1 (selected)
1 (selected)
Clicking Variable Names displays variables declared on I and Q

Address.
In case of an output module having less than 64-channels, you can

specify the flag and data up to 64 channels.
Force I/O Setting

(Example: the 4th bit of Base 0, Slot 0 forced to output value 1, 8th bit to output value 0)
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
Select base 0 and slot 0.

Honeywell
427
11. Online
Step
428
Action
Select the flag and data of the bit 3. %QW0.0.0 is registered to the
established Address.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
R200
11/09
Step
Action
Select the flag of the bit 7. As the forced output value of the bit 7 is 0, no data
needs to be selected. Since %QW0.0.0 is already registered in the pre-set
Address, it is not added again.

Honeywell
429
11. Online
Step
430
Action
Select the Forced Output Enable Flag and then click Apply to apply the
forced value.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Forced I/O Cancel

(Example: the 4th, 8th bit of Base0, Slot 0 forced value to cancel)
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Move to %QW0.0.0. Use the button or directly enter the area to move to.
Click the bit 3 and 7s flag to cancel the forced output value

Honeywell
431
11. Online
Step
Action
Click Apply.
ATTENTION
In program monitoring, the following are applicable:
432
In the case of forced input, monitoring is displayed with the forced

value since the forced input value is updated in the monitor area.
In the case of forced output, monitoring is not displayed since the

forced value is actually output regardless of the calculation result.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Skip I/O setting

Skip is used to enable or disable IO Slots during the PLC operation.
To skip I/O during a PLC operation, perform the following steps:
Step
1
Action
Select Online > Skip I/O.
R200
11/09
Field Label
Description
Base Skip I/O
If the base module is skipped, all slots in the

base are I/O skipped.
Slot Skip I/O
Used to skip a particular IO.
Show Existing Base

Only
Shows existing base only
Details
Displays detailed information of the special

module or the communication module only.
OK
Applies the changes and closes the dialog

box.
Cancel

Honeywell
433
11. Online
Skip I/O Setting for each slot

To skip I/O setting for each slot, perform the following steps:
Step
434
Action
Select the base with the slot to specify Skip I/O.
Select the slot to specify the Skip I/O.
Select the check box corresponding to the module. Observe that * appears
beside the base.
Click OK. The changed items are displayed.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
Action
Click Yes to display the changed items.
Skip I/O Cancel for each slot

To cancel skip I/O for a slot, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the base to cancel the Skip I/O.
Select the slot to cancel the Skip I/O.
Clear the check box corresponding to the module. Observe that the *mark
beside the base disappears if there is no slot where Skip I/O is specified in
the applicable base.

Honeywell
435
11. Online
Step
Action
Base Skip I/O Setting

To set base skip I/O, perform the following steps:
Step
436
Action
Select the base to specify the base Skip I/O.
Select the check box corresponding to the module.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Click OK. The changed items are displayed.

Honeywell
437
11. Online
Step
438
Action
Click Yes to display changed items.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Base Skip I/O cancel

To cancel the base skip I/O:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the base to cancel the base Skip I/O.
Clear the check box corresponding to the selected module. As the base Skip
I/O is canceled, the Skip I/O for each slot can be specified or canceled.

Honeywell
439
11. Online
Step
440
Action
Click OK to apply the specified Skip I/O.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Click Yes to display the changed items.

Honeywell
441
11. Online
Fault Mask
It is used to configure whether the module must be run in Fault during PLC operation.
To view fault mask setting, perform the following steps:
Step
1
Action
Select Online > Fault Mask.
Field Label
442
Description
Base Fault Mask
If the base modules mask is

specified, all slots in the base are
of the fault mask.
Slot Fault Mask
Used to apply the fault mask for

each slot or not.
Show Existing Base Only
Shows existing base only.
Details
Displays detailed information about

the special module or the
Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
Action
communication module.
OK
Applies the changed items and

Cancel
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
Canceling the Fault Mask specified is identical as described in Skip

I/O setting. Refer to section on Skip I/O setting for details.

Honeywell
443
11. Online
ATTENTION
444
The I/O Information dialog box which is similar to Fault Mask or I/O
skip dialog box when Online > I/O Information is selected. I/O Sync.
It is activated only when the PLC is in STOP Mode.
Clicking I/O Sync synchronizes the I/O Parameter of SoftMaster

project with the real module installation information. Please be careful
since the previous I/O parameter is erased.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
11.3. Module Changing Wizard
11.3 Module Changing Wizard

This Wizard is used to change the module while the PLC is in RUN mode. To change the
module during PLC operation, perform the following steps:
Step
1
Action
Select Online > Module Changing Wizard.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Comment
Displays the comment of the module selection

stage.
Base Module Tree
Displays the base module.
Slot Modules List
Displays the information of the slot installed

on the base module.
Back
It is inactive at the module selection stage.
Next
Used to move to the module confirming stage.

It is active only if the module to change is
selected.
Cancel
Finishes the Module Changing Wizard.

Honeywell
445
11. Online
Step
2
Action
Select the module to change at the module selection stage and then click
Next.
Field Label
446
Description
Comment
Displays the comment of the module

confirming stage.
Module Information
Displays detailed information on the selected

module.
Back
Used to move to the module selection stage.
Next
Used to move to the Removing Module.
Cancel
Closes the Module Changing Wizard.
Check the module to change at the module confirming stage.
Click Next if the information displayed is identical to the module to change, or

click Back to go back to the previous stage. In order to cancel the Module
Changing Wizard, click Cancel.
Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
Step
Action
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Comment
Displays the comment of the Removing

Module.
Back
Used to move to the confirming stage of the

module removal.
Next
Used to move to the module installation

stage.
Cancel
Closes the Module Changing Wizard.
Remove the module physically.
After removing the module, click Next. Or click Back to move back to the
previous stage. Or click Cancel to cancel the Module Changing Wizard.
Install the module at the module installation stage.

Honeywell
447
11. Online
Step
Action
Field Label
448
Description
Description
Displays the comment of the module change

complete stage.
Back
It is inactive since going back to previous stage is

unavailable after the module changed.
Finish
Finishes the Module Changing Wizard.
After inserting the module, click Next. Or click Back to move back to the
previous stage. Or click Cancel to cancel the Module Changing Wizard.
Close the Module Changing Wizard.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
11. Online
ATTENTION
During Module removal using the wizard, if the module is not

removed, an error message appears on the dialog box.
During Module installation using the wizard, if the module is not

installed, an error message appears on the dialog box.
ATTENTION
If the Module Changing Wizard is cancelled, Fault Mask and Skip I/O
may continue to be active. Activate the Fault mask and Skip I/O to
make the module operate again.
ATTENTION
To change the module without using the Wizard, perform the following steps:
1.
Set the Skip I/O for the module to change.
2.
Set the Fault Mask for the module to change.
3.
Remove the module from the PLC.
4.
Install a new module.
5.
Release the Skip I/O for the applicable module.
6.
Select Online > PLC Error/Warning to check for any error on the
applicable module.
7.
If no error found on the applicable module, release the Fault Mask for the
module.
For additional information on Skip I/O and Fault Mask specified for the
module, see section on Skip I/O and Fault Mask.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
449
12. Monitoring
12.1 Monitoring
SoftMasters monitoring functions include in common (Start/Stop Monitoring, Pause,
Resume, Pausing Conditions, and Change Current Value).
To start/stop monitoring, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Online > Connect for on-line connection to PLC.
Select Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring. Select Monitor >
Stop Monitoring to stop monitoring.
If LD or IL program is active, it goes to monitoring mode.
ATTENTION
When monitoring starts, correct value may not be monitored if PLC program
and SoftMaster program are different.

Selected Addresss current value or Forced I/O setting can be changed during monitoring
To change current value for a selected Address, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring.
Select address or variable on the program or variable monitoring window.

Honeywell
451
12. Monitoring
12.1. Monitoring
Step
Action
On the menu, select Monitor > Change Current Value.
Field Label
452
Description
Address
Name of the variable where current value is

changed.
Type
Type of the variable where current value is

changed.
Range
Available range of current value to input based on

type.
Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.1. Monitoring
Step
Action
Value On/Off
Device On/Off specified if its type is BOOL.
Value
Variable value specified if its type is not BOOL.
Forced I/O
Forced I/O setting available if variable is I/Q area

and BOOL type.
Flag
It is used for Forced I/O setting.
OK
It is used to transfer setting value to PLC.
Data
Forced I/O data value is specified.
Enter Current Value in dialog box and click OK to change the current value.
ATTENTION
1.
The default value is displayed based on the variables display type. In

other words, if it is displayed in hexadecimal when monitored, current
value changed is in hexadecimal too.
2.
The value may not be entered according to its display type. In other
words, if displayed in hexadecimal, it can be entered as unsigned
decimal.
3.
When you click OK, an error may occur due to ineffective input value or
range exceedance.
4.
Hexadecimal input starts with 16# shown in 16#1234.
5.
As for String type, current value (String) is entered between single

quotation marks such as (abcde).
6.
In case of WSTRING Type, enter the current value (string) between

double quotation marks (abcde).
7.
Only if variable is I/Q address and BOOL type, compulsory I/O is active.
8.
If Forced I/O is inactive, edit box of current value and ON/OFF setting is
inactive.
9.
Change Current Value and Forced I/O Setting are not run at a time.
For additional information on Forced I/O Setting, refer section on Force I/O
Setting.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
453
12. Monitoring
12.1. Monitoring
Pause/Restart Monitoring
You can pause and restart monitoring.
Pause Monitoring
To pause monitoring, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring.
Select Monitor > Pause to stop monitoring momentarily.
Restart Monitoring
To restart monitoring, perform the following steps:
Select Monitor > Resume to restart monitoring.

ATTENTION
PLC is in RUN mode, even if monitoring is momentarily stopped.
You can only restart paused monitoring.
Monitoring value is not renewed if the program screen is moved with

Pause Monitoring.
If the current value is changed with Pause Monitoring, the PLC value
changes but monitoring value of program screen is not renewed.
Pausing Conditions
If a specified address meets the set conditions, monitoring is paused.
To set the pausing conditions, perform the following steps:
Step
454
Action
Select Monitor > Pausing Conditions.
Specify address on dialog box of Pausing Conditions.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.1. Monitoring
Step
Action
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Select All
Used to check all items with no error to allow on

the list.
Use
Used to check setting status of Pause

Monitoring.
Program
Selects a program name
Reset All
Used to cancel all the selected items allowed.
Variable
Used to enter variable name to stop monitoring

momentarily
Condition
Used to select conditions to stop monitoring

momentarily.
Set value
Used to enter condition value to stop monitoring

momentarily.
Type
Displays a variable type
Comment
Used to display description declared in variable.
Find
Used to find the variable to stop monitoring

momentarily on Variable list of a selected
program.
OK
Used to save changed details and close dialog

box.
Cancel
Used to close dialog box without saving

changed details
Click OK to save details.

Honeywell
455
12. Monitoring
12.1. Monitoring
ATTENTION
456
A maximum of ten conditions can be set to pause Monitoring
Items in error are not saved on clicking OK.
Errors are displayed in pink.
String type does not support the function of Pause Monitoring.
Among 5 conditions [==, >, <, >=, <=] available for Pause Monitoring,
one can be selected.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.2. LD Program Monitoring
12.2 LD Program Monitoring

When the SoftMaster is in monitoring mode, it displays contact points prepared in the
Ladder program (normally open contact point, normally closed contact point, Positive
transition pulse contact point, Negative transition pulse contact point), coils (coil,
reverse-coil, set coil, reset coil, Positive transition pulse coil, Negative transition pulse
coil) and function(block) I/O parameters current value.
To start monitoring, perform the following steps
Step
Action
Select Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring.
LD program changes to monitoring mode.
Select Monitor > Change Current Value to change current value.
Monitor display of contact point
1.
R200
11/09
Normally open contact point: If an applicable contact points value is On status,

address (or variable) value is displayed in red, and the power flow inside the contact
point in blue.

Honeywell
457
12. Monitoring
ATTENTION
Monitor-related colors indicated in this manual are the default colors of
SoftMaster. Applicable colors may be changed from menu Tools > Options.
Refer section on Basic Application for more details on the option item.
2.
Normally closed contact point: If applicable contact points value is On status,

address value is displayed in red, and the power flow inside the contact point is not
displayed.
3.
Normally transition pulse contact point: displayed similar to as normally open

contact point.
4.
Normally transition pulse contact point: displayed similar to as normally closed

contact point.
Coil Monitor Display
458
1.
Coil: If applicable coils value is On status, address (or variable) value is displayed
in red, and the power flow inside the coil in blue.
2.
Reverse-coil: If applicable coils value is On status, address (or variable) value is

displayed in red, and the power flow inside the coil is not displayed.
3.
Set coil: displayed similar to coil.
4.
Reset coil: displayed as similar to (negative) coil.
5.
Positive transition pulse coil: displayed as similar to coil.
6.
Negative transition pulse coil: displayed as similar to coil.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Monitor Display of Function (Block)
Monitoring value is displayed on the IO parameter of the function (block). The data of
the function (block) IO parameter is displayed based on the monitoring display format.
ATTENTION
Data Display can be customized using Tools > Options > Online. Refer
section on Basic Application for details.
Start/Stop monitoring
Stop monitoring
Select Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring.

ATTENTION
R200
11/09
When monitoring, all types of Edit is unavailable except Modification

during Run Mode.
When monitoring starts and stops, LD diagram height changes to

display application instructions current value, which takes some time
according to the size of prepared program.

Honeywell
459
12. Monitoring
12.3. Variable Monitoring
12.3 Variable Monitoring

Monitoring is available through specific registered variables.
Variable Monitoring Window
Field Label
460
Description
PLC
Used to display PLC available for registration. A SoftMaster project may

be composed of multi-PLC. Accordingly, it can be displayed on the
variable monitoring window.
Program
Used to select a program name with a variable to register.
Variable Name/
Address
Used to enter the name of a variable or address.
Value
Used to display applicable address value when monitored. The value

can be changed through Change Current Value of monitoring.
Type
Displays the type of a variable.
Address/Variable
Name
Press Enter or double-click an assigned address or variable name to

select a variable on the list of local variable if memory is allocated.
Comment
Comment: displays the variable comment.
Error Display
Error Display: Error is displayed in red.
Error Type
Error type
In case one of PLC name, address and Type is not entered.
In case of incorrect address.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Field Label
Description
In case there is no program name or there is no program in the

PLC.
In case the address type is not supported or PLC name

unavailable.
ATTENTION
The areas of type, address/variable and comment column cannot be

edited by user.
4 variable monitoring tabs cannot be monitored at the same time.
The number of addresses available to register in variable monitoring is

unlimited.
Only the part displayed on the screen is monitored.
The larger the number of addresses, the longer the monitoring refresh
takes.
Even if not in monitoring mode, refresh is available on variable

monitoring.
Registering Variable/Comment
Monitoring items can be registered on Local Variable list on the variable monitoring
windows
To register in variable/comment, perform the following steps:
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
On the monitoring window, right-click and select Register in
Variable/Comment from the context menu.

Honeywell
461
12. Monitoring
462
Step
Action
The Select dialog box appears if two or more PLCs are included in the
project or if two or more programs are included in a PLC. Select the PLC and
program to register.
Click OK. The Select Variable window is displayed.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Variable
Used to enter variable names to find.
Variable type
Displays variables by types.
Variable List
Used to display the list of variables.
OK
Used to register selected items on the variable

monitoring windows.

Honeywell
463
12. Monitoring
ATTENTION
You can select one or more items on Select Variable/Address dialog box.
The selected item is added in the last line of the variable monitoring
windows.
An item same as a previously registered item can be also registered.
Register All
You can register all direct variables at the same time. To register all variables, perform
the following steps:
464
Step
Action
On the variable monitoring window, right-click the mouse and select Register
All from the context menu.
Select dialog box appears if two or more PLCs are included in the project.
Select a PLC and program to register.
Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Register All dialog box appears.
Field label
R200
11/09
Description
Start Address
Used to input start address of the address to

register.
(Address Ex: IX0.0.0, QB1.2.0. MW12)
Count
Used to enter the number of registers.
The variable registration screen is displayed as in the following figure.

Honeywell
465
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
ATTENTION
A maximum of 100 variables can be registered at a time.
The item to register is added at the last line of the variable monitoring
window.
Register by user
The user can directly enter items to register on the variable monitoring window. You can
directly edit the PLC, Program and Variable/Address Column.
ATTENTION
466
Copy, Paste, Cut and Delete functions are provided.
Copy: available in String format on the variable monitoring windows.

Paste is available for Excel and other String editors.
Paste: Paste is available for variable monitoring after Copy from Excel or
other String editors.
Delete: used to delete the selected row. Delete is also applicable for
several selected rows.
Undo or Redo functions are not supported.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Drag and Drop Register from other windows

The user can select contact point, coil, variable, etc. from other windows (LD,
Variable/Comment windows) to drag and drop on the variable monitoring window for
registering.
To drag and drop area to register from other windows, perform the following steps:
Step
1
Action
Select the area from other windows (LD, SFC, Variable/Comment windows)
to register on the variable monitoring.
Area to register onto the variable monitoring from LD window Red Edge.
Area to register variable monitor in the SFC window.
Area to register onto the variable monitoring window from Variable/Comment

window.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
467
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Move to the variable monitoring window keeping the mouses left button
pressed on the selected area.
Cursor shape and input image is created if the mouse is moved onto the
variable monitoring window as shown in the following figure.
Release the left button of the mouse after positioning on the row of the
variable monitoring window to insert the selected items.
The selected items are registered on the variable monitoring window as

shown in the following figure.
ATTENTION
468
The variable registering time is directly proportional to the number of

variables to be registered
There is no limit on the number of variables that can be registered.
Items inserted in the middle of rows, are registered between rows.
With the mouses left button still pressed, move onto variable monitoring
number tabs (Monitoring 1, Monitoring 2, Monitoring 3 and Monitoring 4)
to register on the applicable variable monitoring tabs.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
View Detailed/Briefly
It is a helpful function to view as many variables as possible on the screen of the variable
monitoring window.
To view Detailed/briefly, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the variable monitoring window, select Briefly from the right-click menu.
It is displayed as follows.
Only the columns of variable/address and value are displayed.

3
Select Detailed again to display the following figure containing many a row.
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
Selecting Briefly hides the PLC, Program, Type, Address/Variable and

Comment columns.
Even when in Brief View mode, the hidden columns can be viewed
through View function.
The number of rows is decided by the size of the variable monitoring

window.
In Brief View mode, the number of rows change if the size of the Variable
Monitoring Window changes.
Even if in Brief View mode, Register, Delete and Edit functions are all
available (However, Undo & Redo functions are not supported).
Tool tips display PLC, Type and Address only. However, the variable if
declared is also displayed.

Honeywell
469
12. Monitoring
View options
The user can select specific columns.
To view a selected function, perform the following steps:
Step
470
Action
On the variable monitoring window, select View Option > Column Name
(PLC, Program, Variable/Address, Value, Address/Variable, Comment)
from the right-click menu.
To hide the selected column, select the same menu again from the right click
menu.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
ATTENTION
By default, all view option columns are displayed.
This function is also available in Detailed View mode.
The value column does not support Hide function.
If converted to Detailed or Brief View mode, hidden columns are

displayed by default.
String in the hidden columns cannot be copied and pasted in other

editors.
Display
Display of the monitoring value of the address registered on the variable monitoring can
be changed.
To change the display type of an address, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the variable monitoring window, select Unsigned Decimal, Signed

Decimal, Hexadecimal and String from the right click context menu.
Display type of the selected address changes.
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
BOOL type if viewed in unsigned decimal is displayed On/Off.
Hexadecimal is displayed with small letter prefix 16# as shown in

16#h10AC.
String is displayed in for example, adcd.
Can be set different type than defied in the monitoring option for LD
Display menus are active or inactive based on available display type.

Honeywell
471
12. Monitoring
Monitoring operations
Start Monitoring
It is used to begin monitoring of the registered addresses on the variable monitoring
window.
To start monitoring, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the menu, select Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring.
The item with identical Start Monitoring PLC name and the item with no error
execute Monitoring.
Variable Monitoring Window In monitoring mode.
ATTENTION
PLCs address value is not displayed if not monitored.
Any item with error is not monitored.
Edit, Add and Delete are available even during monitoring.

Current value of the address can be changed in the monitoring mode.
To change the current value of the address in monitoring mode, perform the following
steps:
Step
472
Action
On the menu, select Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring.
Select Address.
On the menu, select Monitor > Change Current Value. Or double-click the
Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
value cell of the address selected on the variable monitoring window, or press
Enter.
Change Current Value Dialog box appears, enabling you to directly enter
the current value.
Click OK to transfer the setting value to the PLC.
Find
Find
It helps to find a string based on the classification by capital/small letter.
ATTENTION
Find and Replace function is not available on the variable monitoring

window.
Value is regarded as a string not as a figure when Find function is run in

the value column.
Find Again
It is used to find the string found before once again. Initiate the Find command on the
program or Variable/Comment, and then initiate Find Again on the variable monitoring
to start find.
Print
It prints the current active variable monitoring tab contents.
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
Hidden columns are not printed.
Print Preview function is not available.

Honeywell
473
12. Monitoring
Shortcut Keys
All the operations are available with shortcut keys on the menu.
ATTENTION
Some shortcut keys are preconfigured and cannot be changed.
Shortcut Keys
Details
Home/End
On the variable monitoring window, select a cell to

edit the cell (PLC, Address, Type Column), where
edit option is available.
Ctrl+Home/End
Moves to the first or the last cell.
Ctrl+Arrow
Moves from the currently selected cell to the first

or the last cell to the left or right, above or below.
Tab
Moves the current cell from the left to the right.
Shift+Tab
Moves the current cell from the right to the left.
Enter
Moves the current cell from above to below. If the

current cell is value column during monitoring, it
changes the current value too. If the current cell is
variable column, it registers on Variable/Comment.
Shift+Enter
Moves the current cell up.
Alignment
Alignment can be changed to ascending or descending sequence.
To change the alignment, perform the following steps:
Step
474
Action
Double-click on the header of the column to align.
Alignment changes to ascending or descending sequence.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
After alignment, an arrow figure indicates the sequence as ascending or

descending.
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
If aligned in descending sequence, a downward arrow is displayed. An

upward arrow indicates the ascending sequence.
By default, it is not aligned when the project is opened.
If aligned once more in descending sequence, it is aligned in ascending

sequence.
Alignment for row is not available.

Honeywell
475
12. Monitoring
12.4. System Monitoring
12.4 System Monitoring

System Monitoring is used to display the PLCs slot information, assigned I/O
information, Module status, and data value.
Basic Application
System Monitoring can be initiated in the following two ways:
On the SoftMaster menu, select Monitor > System Monitoring.
On the Start menu, select Start > Program >SoftMaster > System Monitoring.
The Module Information window displays the information of the PLC slot. After reading
the module information saved in the PLC, it displays it on the data display screen of the
module information window.
Select one of the following options view the Base.
Step
476
Action
Select items on the module information window. (Ex. Base 0, Base 1, )
Select Base items. (Select First, Previous, Next, Last base)

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Use the direction key on the keyboard to position the modules cursor on the
base to select.
ATTENTION
To start System Monitoring, the SoftMaster must be Online with the PLC and
the Monitoring must be ON.
Connect/Disconnect
System Monitoring is initiated from SoftMaster; it can also be initiated independently.
Thus, the connection is available to PLC with Connect options. If connected with PLC,
base information is read from PLC to display on the module information window.
To Connect/Disconnect system monitoring to PLC, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Specify Connect options.
Confirm that the cable is installed as applicable to the connection method.
Select PLC > Connect to connect.
Select PLC > Disconnect to disconnect.
ATTENTION
System Monitoring when initiated connects to the saved Connect

options.
If run in SoftMaster, it connects to SoftMasters Connect options.
Default of Base 0 is displayed on the screen.
System Synchronization
It reads base information, I/O assignment method and slot information specified in the
PLC to display on the screen. When monitored, it reads I/O skip information and forced
I/O input/output information to change the current value.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
477
12. Monitoring
For system synchronization, perform the following steps:

Step
Action
Confirm the connection status with PLC.
Select PLC > System Synchronization.
ATTENTION
Executing system synchronization updates the module information only.
Refer to Basic Parameter Information for details on I/0 assignment

method.
All I/O modules ON/OFF

It is used to check output value of all the I/O modules on the PLC.
All I/O modules ON
It turn the data value of all the I/O modules on the PLC as ON.
To turn ON the data modules
Step
Action
Select PLC > All I/O modules ON.
All I/O modules OFF

It makes the data value of all the I/O modules on the PLC as OFF.
To turn OFF all I/O modules, perform the following steps:
Step
478
Action
Select PLC > All I/O modules OFF.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Selected I/O modules ON/OFF

It is used to check the output value of the selected I/O modules on the PLC.
Selected I/O module ON
All IOs selected are forced to ON.
To turn ON a selected I/O module, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select PLC > Selected I/O modules ON.
Selected I/O module OFF

All I/Os selected are forced to OFF.
To turn OFF a selected I/O module, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select PLC > Selected I/O modules OFF.

To change the current value, the SoftMaster must be connected to the PLC and be in the
monitoring mode. Click the contact point to change the data value of the selected contact
point to ON or OFF.
To change the current value of a selected contact point, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Ensure that the PLC is online and the monitoring mode is enabled.
Position the mouse cursor on the I/O modules contact point to change the
cursor to hand shape.
Click the I/O modules contact point.

Honeywell
479
12. Monitoring
ATTENTION
Move the mouse to the I/O contact point to display the assigned address
on the status bar (located on the bottom-right of the window).
If I/O skip is specified, it is always displayed as OFF.
Information Display of Power Module

Information of Power Module displays base power shutdown history including date, time
and details in which power shutdown bases are displayed.
480

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
To display the information of a power module, perform the following steps:

Step
Action
Select one of the following methods to display module information:

Select the Power Module and on the menu, select PLC > Module Info.
Select the Power Module and select Module Info. from the right-click
context menu.
Select the Power Module on the screen and press Enter.
Select and double-click on the Power Module displayed on the screen.
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
A maximum of 100 power shutdowns are displayed on the screen.
No module information is available for empty slots and I/O modules.

Honeywell
481
12. Monitoring
Information Display of CPU module

Information of CPU Module displays the CPU version, type, operation mode, key status,
CPU status, connection status, mode conversion source, forced I/O setting status, I/O
skip and Fault mask status.
To display the information of a CPU module, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select one of the following methods to display the CPU module information.
Select the CPU Module and select PLC > Module Info.
Select and right-click on the CPU Module and select CPU Module Info.
from the context menu

Select the CPU Module on the Module Information window, and right click
to select CPU Module Info. on the context menu.

Select the CPU Module on the screen and press Enter.
Double-click on the CPU Module displayed on the screen.
482

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Information Display of Communication Module

Information of Communication Module displays module type, operation mode, hardware
error & hardware version, O/S version and its installed date.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
483
12. Monitoring
To display the information of a communication module, perform the following steps:

Step
Action
Select one method among those below to display the COM module
information.
With Communication Module selected, on the menu, select PLC > Module
Info.
With Communication Module selected, right-click the mouse to select COM
Module Info. on the menu.

With Communication Module selected on the Module Information window,
right-click the mouse to select Connection Module Info. on the menu.

If Communication Module is selected on the screen, press Enter.
Double-click the mouse positioned on Communication Module displayed
on the screen.
484

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
R200
11/09
Action

Honeywell
485
12. Monitoring
Viewing Information of Special Modules

Information of Special Module displays the module name, O/S version & date and
module status.
To display the information of a special module, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select one of the following methods to display special module information:

Select the Special Module and select PLC > Module Information.
Select the Special Module and select Special Module Info. from the right-
click context menu.

Select a Special Module on the Module Information window and choose
Special Module Info. from the right-click context menu.

Select a Special Module on the screen and press Enter.
Double-click a Special Module displayed on the screen.
486

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Classification
R200
11/09
Description
Module name
Provides special modules type and its

detailed information.
O/S version
Provides special modules installed O/S

version information, which is used for
upgrading module O/S later.
O/S date
Provides special modules latest O/S

updated date information.
Module status
Provides special modules current status

(error code) information.

Honeywell
487
12. Monitoring
It reads PLCs I/O data to display on the screen.
Start Monitoring
Step
Action
Select PLC > Start Monitoring.
Stop Monitoring
To stop monitoring, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select PLC > Stop Monitoring.
Special Module Monitoring

It initiates monitoring the special module (A/D module, D/A module, HS counter
module).
To run special module monitoring, perform the following steps:
Step
488
Action
Select PLC > Special Module Monitoring.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
R200
11/09
Action

Honeywell
489
12. Monitoring
ATTENTION
Positioning module does not support PLC's module monitoring
Positioning modules monitoring function is installed along with its

exclusive software to monitor.
Save
It is used to save the system information and data currently displayed on the screen.
To save the data and system information, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select File > Save.
Select File > Save As to save the data as a different name.
ATTENTION
File extension is set as (.smi).
Open
It is used to read the system information file previously saved.
To open a file:
490
Disconnect from PLC.
Select File > Open.
Double-click an applicable file name.
Drag & drop the file onto the System Monitoring to open it.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Navigate Base
It selects a base to show its module information.
To navigate the first, previous, next and last base, perform the following steps:
Step
1
Action
Navigate to the first base.
On the menu, select Base > First Base.
Navigate to the previous base.

On the menu, select Base > Previous Base.
Navigate to the next base.

On the menu, select Base > Next Base.
Navigate to the last base.

On the menu, select Base > Last Base.
Print Preview
This function is used to see a print preview of system monitoring.
On the Preview window, the user can modify the area to be printed.
For a preview before printing, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the menu, select PLC>Disconnect.
On the System Monitoring window, select File > Preview on the menu.
Modify the area of the image displayed.
Move the mouse to the edge.
Mouse cursor changes.
Move the mouse while being clicked to modify the size.

Honeywell
491
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
ATTENTION
492
The specified area of Preview is saved.
In monitoring mode, Preview is not available.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address Monitoring
12.5 Address Monitoring

Address Monitoring enables the monitoring of all the address areas data in the PLC.
It can write or read data value on the PLCs specific address. In addition, Address
Monitoring can display the data value continuously when displayed or entered on the
screen depending on the bit format and display method.
Basic Application
Address Monitoring is performed by the following two ways:
On the SoftMaster menu, select Monitor > Address Monitoring.
On the Start menu, select Program > SoftMaster > Address Monitoring.
The Address information window displays all the address areas in the PLC, based on
CPU type.
Double-click the address icon (Ex. I. Q, M, R, W) or right-click on the Address Tree
window and choose Open Address from the context menu.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
493
12. Monitoring
ATTENTION
To start Address monitoring, SoftMaster must be Online with PLC and

the Monitoring must be ON.
If Monitoring mode is OFF, the address displays the previous data value.
The data value is initialized to 0.
Address Areas
Address Areas are necessary for effective and correct control of various types of data.
PLC provides various address areas of data to manage such data effectively.
For additional information on the respective detailed address area, see 2MLI
CPUU Users Guide.
Data Format and Display Items

Data is displayed on the screen in the following ways:
Display Setting
Description
Data Size
1 bit, 8 bits, 16 bits, 32 bits and 64 bits
Display Format
Binary, BCD, Unsigned decimal, Signed

decimal, Hexadecimal, Real, String
1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, and 64 bit

Data size of the address is displayed in 1 bit 1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, or 64 bit
To display the data size of the address in 1 bit 1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, or 64 bit:
494
Select View > View Options >1 bit/8 bit/16 bit/32 bit/64 bit from the menu of the
Address Monitoring window.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
ATTENTION
The address of a selected cell is displayed in the task bar.
Binary, BCD, Unsigned decimal, signed decimal, hexadecimal, real, and Text
Address data can also be displayed in binary, BCD, unsigned decimal, signed decimal,
hexadecimal, real, and text format by choosing the appropriate View option.
Edit Data
Data value is specified to write address data on the PLC, or to write the selected area on
the PLC.
Edit Cell
It is used to edit data in the cell.
To edit data in the cell:
R200
11/09

Honeywell
495
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Use the mouse or keyboard to select an optional cell.
If in monitoring mode, data can be directly entered in the selected cell. If

monitoring is off, double click the bottom right of the cell to open a dialog box
to enter the data.
Cut, Copy, Paste, delete data

You can Cut, Copy, Paste, and delete data from the cell. This works like the standard
windows functions.
Fill
It is used to fill the selected data.
To fill a selected area:
Step
Action
Use the mouse to select the cell area to fill automatically.
Position the mouse at the end of the cell to make the mouse cursor shaped
+.
Move the mouse with its left button pressed up/down and right/left.
Release the left button of the mouse.
Save Address
Use one of the following three methods to save the address.
Save All Address Areas
To save all address areas:
Step
Action
Select File > Save.
Select File > Save As to save the data with a different name.
File extension is set as (.mem).
496

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Save Respective Address Area

To save a respective address area:
Step
1
Action
Select File > Export Address to File.
File extension is set as (address+m). (Ex. iim, iqm, imm,)
R200
11/09

Honeywell
497
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Save Respective Address Area with all windows closed

To save a respective address area in case of all windows closed:
Step
Action
Select File > Export Address to File.
Select the address to save from the combo box.

File extension is set as (i+device+m). (Ex. iim, iqm, imm,)
Open Address
Use one of the following three methods available to open an address.
Open All Address Areas
To open all address areas:
498
Select File > Open.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Import Address from File

To import an address from file:
R200
11/09
On the menu, select File > Import Address from File.

Honeywell
499
12. Monitoring
Open Respective Address Area with all windows closed

To open a respective address area in case of all windows closed:
Step
Action
Select File > Import Address from File.
Select the address to open from the combo box.
ATTENTION
When in monitoring mode, Open and Import Address from File are inactive.
Data Value Setting

Data value of the address is specified according to its display type and the number of bits.
In addition, setting area of the data value can be selected.
To set the data value, perform the following steps:
500
Stop monitoring.
Select Edit > Fill Data Area.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
R200
11/09

Honeywell
501
12. Monitoring
Field Label
502
Description
Title bar
Used to display the address to set its data value.
Data value
Used to input and display the data compatible with the number of bits
and the display format.
Bit value
Used to decide the size of data.
Setup area
Used to decide the range the data value is applied to in the address.
Display
Used to decide the input format of data and change the format of the
data value according to changed value display if any data value is
available.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
ATTENTION
Address name is displayed on the title to display the dialog box for Setting
Data Value.
Clear Data
It is used to delete all data values of the address.
To delete all the data values of an address, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Edit > Clear Data.
You are prompted to confirm the deletion of all address areas.

Honeywell
503
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Write to PLC
It is used to transfer the address data saved in on-line computer to PLC.
To write a saved address data to PLC, perform the following steps:
Step
504
Action
Ensure PLC is connected and the monitoring mode is inactive.
Select PLC > Write to PLC.
Select the address to write on Write dialog box of PLC.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Address Area
Used to display the list of the addresses to

write on PLC.
Select All
Used to select all the addresses in the

address area.
Unselect All
Used to cancel all the addresses selected

in the address area.
Click OK to write the selected address on the PLC.
ATTENTION
F addresss exclusive Read areas cannot be written on PLC. Exclusive Read
areas are based on the type of CPU.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
505
12. Monitoring
Read from PLC

It is used to read the address data saved in PLC to on-line computer.
To read a saved address data from PLC, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Ensure PLC is connected and is in the monitoring mode.
Select address PLC > Read from PLC.
Select the address to read from Read dialog box of PLC.
Field Label
506
Description
Address Area
Used to display the list of the

addresses to read from PLC.
Select All
Used to select all the addresses in

the address area.
Unselect All
Used to cancel all the addresses

selected in the address area.
Click OK to read the selected address from the PLC.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Write Selected Area on PLC

It is used to write the address data in the selected area on PLC connected.
To write the address data of a selected area to PLC, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select the area to write on PLC.
Select PLC > Write Selected Area to PLC.
You are prompted to confirm if you want to write the selected area on PLC.
Click OK to write the selected area on PLC.
It reads the address data from PLC to display on the screen in the on-line status, or it
stops reading the data.
Start Monitoring
It reads the address data from PLC to display on the screen in the on-line status.
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select PLC > Start Monitoring.

Honeywell
507
12. Monitoring
Stop Monitoring
It stops reading the address data from PLC in the on-line status.
To stop monitoring, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select PLC > Stop Monitoring.
ATTENTION
If in monitoring mode, the data cannot be edited.
If in monitoring mode, Write to PLC, Read from PLC, Write Selected

Area to PLC are not available.

It is used to change the data value of the cell in monitoring mode.
To change the data value of a cell in monitoring mode, perform the following steps:
Step
508
Action
Ensure PLC is connected and the monitoring mode is active.
Select PLC > Change Current Value.
The Change Current Value dialog box is displayed.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Field Label CellHeading
Description
CellHeading
Address
Used to display the start address to change the

current value.
Bit number
Used to display the number of bits to change the

current value.
Usually it is identical to 1, 8, 16, 32 or 64

bits as displayed on the screen.
String format is displayed in 32*8 bits.
Display
Used to display the data display format to change

the current value.
Set Value
Used to display the data value to change the current

value.
ATTENTION
If the current value is changed in string display format, the data value of 32byte area is always changed from the start address.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
509
12. Monitoring
PLC Type Settings

It is used to display the PLC type currently set or to set address data based on the PLC
type.
To view or change the PLC type settings:
Select File > PLC Type Settings.
Field Label
Description
PLC Type
Used to display or change the PLC type

currently set.
CPU type
Displays the currently set CPU type or

changes the CPU type.
ATTENTION
While connected to the PLC, the current PLC type is displayed but is not
changeable.
Screen Zoom-In/Zoom-Out
It is used to zoom in or out the size of the screen displayed.
To zoom-in, on the menu, select View > Zoom-In.
To zoom-out, on the menu, select View > Zoom-Out.
Automatic Width/Height Adjustment

This function is used to adjust the size of the data values to display on the screen.
510

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Width AutoFit adjusts the size to the string length of the cell. Automatic Height
Adjustment adjusts the row height to the string height of the cell.
To auto-fit width adjustment, on the menu, select View > Width Auto-Fit.
To auto-fit height adjustment, on the menu, select View > Height Auto-Fit.
View Properties
It is used to change the font and font size of the data value displayed on the screen. In
addition, the color of the data value can be changed in the monitoring mode.
To view the properties of data value, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select View > View Properties.
Select Font to change font.
Select Color to change color.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Font Type, Font size
Shows currently displayed font name and font

size.
Font
Calls a dialog box to change font name and

font size displayed on the screen.
Honeywell
511
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Data value color
Displays color of data value currently

specified in monitoring mode.
Color
Calls a dialog box to change color of data

value in monitoring mode.
Click OK to apply the newly specified value.
Page Setting
It is used to specify the address page printed. Page margins, title and grid lines can be
shown or hidden as necessary. In addition, the sequence of pages to print can be specified
with priority of row or column.
To view or change the page settings, perform the following steps:
Step
512
Action
Select File > Page Setup.
Specify margins.
Show or hide title and grid lines as necessary.
Specify the sequence of pages to print with priority of row or column.
Specify the print type of the center of page, horizontal or vertical.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
R200
11/09
Action

Honeywell
513
12. Monitoring
12.6. Special Module Monitoring
12.6 Special Module Monitoring

Step
Action
From the SoftMaster menu, select Monitor > Special Module Monitoring to
display Special Module list.
The following dialog box is displayed. It displays the list of special module
currently installed on the PLC system
514
Select a module on the list and click Monitor. The Special Module
Monitoring dialog box is displayed as follows.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Field Label
FLAG Monitor
(applicable only to HS
counter module)
R200
11/09
Description
Flag monitoring function is used to run
instructions for HS counter module. The
user can check the instruction and enter
signal status along with HS counter
monitoring/test screen as well as Flag
monitoring screen displayed at the same

Honeywell
515
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
time.
Parameter Setting
Screen
Parameter setting screen is divided into

parameter changing area (setting value) and
confirming area (current value) that the
changed parameter is successfully
transferred to the module during monitoring.
Start Monitoring
Click Start Monitoring to start monitoring

being displayed on the screen. Click Start
Monitoring again to stop monitoring.
Test
After changing the parameter at the bottom

of the Monitoring/Test screen, click Test
Start to begin testing the operation of
applicable special module, which directly
transfers the parameter information to the
module so to display its result on the
monitoring screen for the user to confirm.
Contact Point Input

Signal Status Screen
The user can confirm HS counter status of

input contact point signal (ON/OFF) through
the upper of the Flag monitoring screen.
Instruction Screen
The user can initiate the instruction for HS

counter operation and additional functions at
the bottom of the Flag monitoring screen. If
the instruction is correctly run, the status of
the applicable instruction is displayed as
ON/OFF.
Through the Monitoring/Test screen, the user can directly change the
parameter value saved in the special module while checking the test
operation and its status of the applicable module.
ATTENTION
Select the HS counter module on the special module screen to write HS
counter Flag monitoring and instruction functions.
516

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend Monitoring
12.7 Trend Monitoring

Trend monitoring is used to read the data periodically from the PLC connected to display
in a graphical format. The trend monitoring window is composed of bit graph and trend
graph. In the bit graph, bit addresss On/Off status is displayed in stair-shaped graph.
And in the trend graph, the variation trend of the data is displayed with the address value
converted from word to data format specified.
Configuring Trend Monitoring
To configure trend monitoring,
Step
1
Action
Select Monitoring>Trend Monitoring. Select Graph > Trend Settings.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
517
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Frequency
Used to specify the cycle to read data from

PLC. The shorter the cycle is, the more correct
the data is, which may have an influence on
PLC scan and PC performance, though.
Address Setting
Used to assign the address to monitor. The

address can be displayed in bit or in real as
specified.
OK

dialog box.
Cancel
ATTENTION
518
The Max. samples to display cannot be greater than the Max. sample to
keep.
The Max. time to display cannot be greater than the Max. time to keep.
The relationship between the Max. samples to keep and the Max.
sample to display is as shown in the following figure. In the following
figure, Graph is of the current graph area displayed on the screen, which
can be scrolled horizontally as many as the max. samples displayed.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
The Max. samples to keep means the max. number of samples available
to save on the file.
Start Trend Monitoring

To start trend monitoring, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Connect to the PLC.
Select Monitor > Trend Monitoring.

Honeywell
519
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Legend
Description
Bit graph: displays the data of bit address.
Bit graph index: displays the bit graph and graph colors.
Bit graph current value: displays the current value of the

bit address.
Trend graph: displays the data of word address.
Trend graph index: displays the word address and graph

colors.
Trend graph current value: displays the current value of

word address.
ATTENTION
The data displayed in the trend monitor may be different with the actual data.
In order to monitor accurate timing, please use the data trace function.
For information on the data trace function, see section on Data Traces
Setting Bit Address

It is used to enter the bit address to monitor.
To set a bit address, perform the following steps:
Step
520
Action
Select Monitoring>Trend Monitoring.
Select Graph > Trend Settings.
Select the bit graph tab on the Trend Setup dialog box.
Enter the address of bit type. Or double-click the variable column to select the
declared address on the Variable/Comment dialog box.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
ATTENTION
A maximum of 8 bit addresses can be registered.
Setting Trend Graph

It is used to set the trend address to monitor.
To set a trend address, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Graph > Trend Settings.
Select the trend graph tab on the Setting Monitoring dialog box.
Enter the address of word type. Or double-click the variable column to select
the declared address on the Variable/Comment dialog box.
Click the type column to select the data type.
ATTENTION
A maximum of four trend addresses can be registered. Supported data types
are as follows:
Type
R200
11/09
Size
Type
Size
BIT
1 bit
REAL
4 bytes
BYTE
1 byte
LREAL
8 bytes
WORD
2 bytes
INT
2 bytes
DWORD
4 bytes
DINT
4 bytes
LWORD
8 bytes
LINT
8 bytes

Honeywell
521
12. Monitoring
Setting graph
To view or change graph settings, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Graph > Graph Settings
Field Label
522
Description
Show grid
Used to decide to show XY grid or not on the

screen.
Show X-axis data
Used to decide to show X-axis data or not.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
X-axis data option
Used to specify the display method of X-axis

data.
Minimum
value/Maximum value
Used to set the max./min. range of the graph.
Bit graph legend
Used to specify the position of bit graph index.

No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom
and Right Bottom are available for the Bit
Index Position.
Trend graph legend
Used to specify the position of trend graph

index. No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left
Bottom and Right Bottom are available for the
Trend Index Position.
Color
Used to specify address color of each graph.
OK

dialog box.
Cancel
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
The max./min. value is applied only to Y-axis of the trend graph, and not
applied if View Current Y-axis is automatically adjusted.
The min. value input cannot be greater than the max. value.
The actual datas max./min. value range and specified graphs max./min.
value range are as shown below. Only the range in gray is displayed in
the graph.

Honeywell
523
12. Monitoring
If View is not selected in Setting Color, its applicable address is not

displayed in the graph.
Graph Color Settings

To change the color of a graph, perform the following steps:
Step
524
Action
Select the address to change its graph color.
Click the color column to display the Color dialog box. On the dialog box,
select a color and then click OK.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
View Graph Option Settings

To view graph option settings, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the address to change its Graph Option.
Select or cancel the Check Box of View Column.

Honeywell
525
12. Monitoring
Setting Graph Window

It is used to decide to change View Graph Option and display the data value as necessary.
To view or change graph window settings:
Step
Action
Select Graph > Graph window Settings.
Field Label
526
Description
View all
Displays all the bit and trend graphs.
View bit graph
Displays only the bit graph.
View graph value
Displays only the bit graph value.
View trend graph value
Displays the trend graph value.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Graph function
View Cursor
It is used to display the data value the mouse is positioned on. To view the data value the
mouse is positioned on, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Graph > Show Cursor.
Click to select the graph. Whenever the mouse moves, the data value the
cursor is positioned on is displayed.
ATTENTION
Show cursor function is only active in the state of Stop Monitoring/Pause
Monitoring.
Scroll Synchronization
It is used to synchronize the bit graph with the trend graph in time axis. It is useful in
monitoring the bit graph and the trend graph data simultaneously.
For scroll synchronization, perform the following steps:
Step
1
Action
Select Graph > Synchronize Scrolling..
Move the horizontal scroll bar to scroll the bit graph and the trend graph at
the same time based on the specified Scroll Synchronization.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
527
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Adjust X-axis magnification

It is used to adjust X-axis magnification.
To adjust X-axis magnification:
528
Select Graph > Zoom In X axis, Zoom Out X axis, Reset X-axis. Based on the
selected item, X-axiss time interval is increased, decreased or back to default value.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Adjust Y-axis magnification

It is used to adjust Y-axis magnification.
To adjust Y-axis magnification:
Select Graph > Zoom In Y axis, Zoom Out Y axis, Reset Y axis. Based on the
selected item, Y-axiss height is increased, decreased or back to default value.
Adjust X-axis Automatically

It is used to decide to adjust X-axis automatically. If the automatic adjustment is set, the
horizontal scroll bar disappears and all the data can be seen at a glance.
To adjust X-axis automatically:
R200
11/09
Select Graph > Auto-Fit X axis.

Honeywell
529
12. Monitoring
Auto-Fit Y-axis
It is used to decide to adjust Y-axis automatically. The automatic adjustment of Y-axis is
applicable only to the trend graph.
To adjust Y-axis automatically:
Select Graph > Auto-Fit Y-axis.

ATTENTION
If the function of Auto-fit Y axis is not selected, the display is based on the
max./min. value specified in Graph Settings.
Save as Bitmap
It is used to save the graph currently displayed on the screen on the file in window bit
map.
To save the data as a bitmap, perform the following steps:
Step
530
Action
Select Graph > Save Trend data as Bitmap.
Input a file name to save with and then click OK.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
Save as Text
It is used to save the graph data on the file in text. Samples as many as the max. samples
kept specified in setting the max. graph is saved.
To save the data as a text, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select Graph > Save Trend data as Text.
Input a file name to save with and then click OK.
ATTENTION
The String file is saved in CSV format of Excel.
Copy to Clipboard
It is used to copy the graph currently displayed on the screen onto the window clipboard.
To copy the graph to clipboard, perform the following steps:
R200
11/09
Select Graph > Copy to Clipboard.

Honeywell
531
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
12.8 Data Traces

Trace Data is used to specify the trace condition and address to trace in the PLC to
collect the data complying with the specified condition from PLC. In the SoftMaster,
applicable data read from the PLC is displayed as a graph. While being similar to the
trend monitoring, it can collect more correct data as read from PLC.
Trace Data operates as follows.
Steps
532
Details

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
Ready
Trace Setting
Writing to PLC
Trace starts
Read Data
Creating a graph
R200
11/09
Confirm the connection with PLC and the Run status of PLC.
Decide to allow trace or not, And specify trigger condition, sample

properties and trace address. See section on Trace Setting for more
details.
Write trace setting items on PLC. See section on Write Trace Setting
for more details.
Start trace with specified trigger conditions automatically or with
manual trace selected. Refer to Trace Setting for detailed trigger
setting, and 4) Start Manual Trace in Write Trace Setting for detailed
manual trace.
Read trace data from PLC. See section on Read Trace in Write Trace
Setting for more details
See section on Trace Setting for more details.

Honeywell
533
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
To view data trace, perform the following steps:

Step
1
534
Action
On the SoftMaster menu, select Monitor > Data Traces.
Field Label
Description
a. Menu
Displays the data trace menu.
b. Tool Box
Displays the tool box of the data trace.
c. Bit graph
Index
Displays the bit address and graph color.
d. Bit graph
Displays the data of bit address.
e. Word graph
Index
Displays the word address and graph color.
f. Word graph
Displays the data of word address.
g. Status bar
Displays the status of data trace.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
Step
Action
h. Progress bar
Displays the progress status if data is read from PLC.
PLC status
Displays off-line status and the operation status of

PLC.
j. Trace status
Displays the trace status of PLC.
Connecting to PLC
To connect to the PLC,
Select Online > Connect.

ATTENTION
For additional information, see section on Connection Options for the PLC.
Trace Setting
It is used to specify trace conditions and trace address.
To view or change data trace settings:
Step
1
Action
On the SoftMaster menu, select Monitor> Data Traces.
The Data Traces window is displayed as follows.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
535
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
Step
Action
On the Data Traces window, select Trace > Trace Settings from the menu.
The following dialog box is displayed.
536

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
Step
Action
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Trace
Decides to allow the trace or not.
Trigger settings
Specifies the condition for trace start. A trigger

condition bit condition or word condition can be
selected.
Bit condition
Decides to use bit trigger condition or not. As

for bit trigger setting, refer to Step 3 Setting Bit
Trigger.
Address
Specifies the address to monitor the bit trigger

condition.
Word condition
Decides to use word trigger condition or not. As

for word trigger setting, refer to Step 6 Setting
Word Trigger.
Address
Specifies the address to monitor the word

Honeywell
537
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
Step
Action
trigger condition.
Sampling frequency
Specifies the cycle to collect data.
Total sample
Specifies the number of samples in total to

collect. The number of samples in total is
decided based on the input sample address.
Samples after trigger
Specifies the number of samples to collect after

triggered.
OK
Saves the changed items and closes the dialog

box.
Cancel
Setting bit trigger

3
To set the bit trigger, select the bit condition check box.
Enter the address to use as a bit condition. Bit address format only is
available.
Specify trigger condition, where rising or falling is available. Rising means

that the address value changes from 0 to 1, and falling means that the
address value changes from 1 to 0.
Setting Word trigger
To set the Word Trigger, select the word condition check box.
It uses the variation of the word address value as a trigger condition.
Enter the address to use as a word condition. Word address format only is
available.
Enter the constant value to compare with word address value.
Select a condition to use to compare with the constant value input. Available
conditions are as follows.
< (less than), <= (less than or equal to), == (equal to), >= (greater than or
equal to), > (greater than),
Bit address settings
10
Select the Bit address settings tab on the Data Trace Settings dialog box.
It is used to select the bit address to collect data. The selected address is
538

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
Step
Action
displayed in a bit graph.
Field Label
Description
Number of
addresses
Displays the number of bit addresses specified.
Size of data
Displays the size of the data specified. More than

1 bit address is displayed in 2 bytes.
Address list
Displays the list of the bit addresses specified.

Enter the address of bit type. Right-click eth
mouse and select Add Line to add a line. Rightclick the mouse and select Delete Line to delete
the address.
ATTENTION
A maximum of 16 bit type addresses can be entered.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
539
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
Step
Action
Word Address Settings
11
Select the word address setting tab on the Data Trace Settings dialog box.
It is used to select the word address to collect data. The selected address is
displayed in a word graph.
Field Label
540
Description
Number of
Address
Displays the number of word address specified.
Size of data
Displays the size of the data specified. The size is

decided based on the specified data type.
Address list
Displays the list of the word addresses specified.
Address
Enter the address of word type.
Data type
Select the data type of address.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
Step
Action
ATTENTION
A maximum of 8 addresses of word type can be entered.
Supported data types are as follows.
Type
Size
Type
Size
SINT
1 byte
REAL
4 bytes
INT
2 bytes
LREAL
8 bytes
DINT
4 bytes
INT
2 bytes
LINT
8 bytes
DINT
4 bytes
USINT
1 byte
LINT
8 bytes
ATTENTION
Use the number of samples in total and the number of samples after triggered
to apply various collection methods.
Number of Samples in Total = Number of Samples after triggered: a

method to collect data after triggered, which is used when the data
before triggered is not necessary.
Number of Samples in Total > Number of Samples after triggered (0): a

method to collect data even before triggered, which is used when the
data before and after triggered is necessary.
Number of Samples after triggered = 0: a method not to collect data after

triggered, which is used when the data after triggered is not necessary
Graph settings
To view or change graph address settings:
R200
11/09
Select Graph > Graph Settings.

Honeywell
541
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
542
a)
Show grid: used to decide to show XY grid or not on the screen.
b)
Show trigger: used to decide to display the trigger position on the graph, and
to specify color.
c)
Bit graph legend: used to specify the position of bit graph index. The options
are displayed as displayed No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom
and Right Bottom for the Bit Index Position.
d)
Word graph legend: used to specify the position of word graph index. The
options are displayed as No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom and
Right Bottom for the Word Index Position.
e)
Color setup: used to specify address color of each graph.
f)
OK: applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.
g)

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
Graph Color Setting

To change the color of a graph, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select the address to change its graph color.
Click the color column to display applicable dialog box. On the dialog box,
select a color and click OK.
Trace
It is used to read the data traced from the PLC or the data specified.
Write Trace Setting
It applies the trace setting to the PLC.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
543
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
To view write trace settings:
On the menu, select Trace > Write Trace Settings.
Read Trace Settings

It is used to read trace settings from the PLC.
To view read trace settings:
On the menu, select Trace > Read Trace Settings.
Read Data Traces

It reads trace data from PLC.
To read data traces:
On the menu, select Trace > Read Trace.
Start Manual Trace

It is used to start to trace data under the trace condition currently specified.
To start tracing the data manually:
On the menu, select Trace > Start Manual Trace. If data is currently traced, the
applicable menu is inactive.
Animation
Using the trace data read from the PLC, it displays the data chronological sequence.
Animation Settings
To view animation settings:
544
Step
Action
On the Data Traces window menu, select Animation > Animation Setting.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Frequency
Used to specify the cycle to update the data

sample on the screen. Available data update
cycles are 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000 and
2000ms value.
OK

dialog box.
Cancel
Start
It is used to start Animation. Animation is active only with trace data available.
On the menu, select Animation > Start Animation.
Pause
It is used to stop Animation in progress momentarily.
On the menu, select Animation > Animation Pause/Resume.
Resume
It is used to continue Animation which was momentarily stopped.
On the menu, select Animation > Animation Pause/Resume.
Stop
It is used to stop Animation.
R200
11/09
On the menu, select Animation > Stop Animation.

Honeywell
545
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
Graph Function
For additional information on the basic graph functions, see section on Graph
Functions.
Move Trigger
It moves the trigger to its generated point of time.
To move the trigger:
On the menu, select Graph > Go to Trigger Position.
File function
It is used to save or read trace setting from the file.
Open
To open a file, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the menu, select File > Open.
Select a file name to open on the File dialog box and click OK.
Save
To save a file, perform the following steps:
Step
546
Action
On the menu, select File > Save.
Enter the file name to save with on File Save Box and click OK.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
Save as
To save a file with a specific file name, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the menu, select File > Save As.
Enter a different file name to save with on File Save Box and then click OK.
Save as Bit Map

It is used to save the graph currently displayed on the screen on the file in window bit
map.
To save the data as a bit map, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the menu, select File > Send > Save as Bitmap.
Enter the name of a file with which to save with and click OK.
Save Text
It is used to save the graph data on the file in text. Samples as many as the max. samples
specified in setting the max. graph are saved.
To save trace data as text:
Step
Action
On the menu, select File > Send > Save Trace data as Text.
Enter a file name to save with and then click OK.
Copy Clipboard
It is used to copy the graph currently displayed on the screen to the window clipboard.
To copy the data onto the windows clipboard:
R200
11/09
On the menu, select File > Send > Copy to Clipboard.

Honeywell
547
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
View Function
This function is used to display or hide the tool bar and the status display line on the
screen.
View Tool Bar
To view toolbar,
On the menu, select > View > Tool Name.
View Status Display Line

To view Status Display Line
On the menu, select View > Status bar.
Data
It displays the trace data value. View Data is active only with trace data available.
To view Trace Data,
548
On the menu, select View > Trace Data.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
R200
11/09
a)
Trace info: displays the trace sampling cycle.
b)
View Settings: displays the trace details.

Honeywell
549
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data Traces
550
c)
Data Grid: displays the current value specified in the sequence of the
samples. The sample data is displayed in negative before triggered, and in
positive after triggered.
d)
Minimum, Maximum, Average: displays the Min., Max., and Average value
per address.
e)
Close: closes the dialog box.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
12.9 Custom Events

Overview of Custom events
The Custom Events refer to a series of events whose conditions are the addresses
specified by the user. User defined events are registered in the PLC, which monitors the
registered events and records the event history if generated. The event history can be
used to operate and debug the system.
To set custom events, perform the following steps:

Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
Make a program as follows.

Honeywell
551
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Step
552
Action
Write the program to the PLC and select Monitor > Custom Event.
Select Menu>Add event and setup each items as in the following figure.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
R200
11/09
Step
Action
Click Associated Address Setup tab and setup the bit address %MX100
and word address %MW0 as in the following figure to store the data when the
event is met.

Honeywell
553
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Step
Action
Click OK to close the dialog box.

Select Enable for Custom Event Capture and click OK. A message box is
displayed as in the following figured since the event setup has been changed.
Click Yes on the message box.
554
Change the PLC mode to RUN.
Select Monitor > Custom Event on the Online menu to check event history
and select event history tab on the Custom Event dialog box.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
R200
11/09
Step
Action
In the Event history tab, an Event History dialog box is displayed when an
event item is selected, and Properties is clicked, where the list of associated
address and the details of event can be seen.

Honeywell
555
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Step
Action
Event Setting
Example
An event is defined as the data of %MW0 whose data is increase by 1 every scan is
greater than 100 and less than 110, and if the event is met, PLC stores the data of
%MW0.
For Event setting, perform the following steps:
Step
556
Action
Select Monitor > Custom Events.
Click the Event settings tab on the user event dialog box.
Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Field Label
Description
Custom Event capture
Used to determine allowing the user event or

not. If the event is disabled, PLC does not
collect the Custom Events.
Events History
Displays the list of the Custom Events

currently specified.
Menu
Displays the event setting menu.
Apply PLC
Applies the changed items to CPU without

closing the dialog box.
OK

dialog box.
Cancel

Honeywell
557
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
ATTENTION
For additional information on each item of the events list, see section on
Adding Custom Event Item.
Adding Custom Event Item

To add a custom event item, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the Custom Event dialog box, select Add Event from Menu.
Select the Basic setting tab.
Field Label
558
Description
Address
Used to enter the address to

monitor the events. The event
address is of the value 0 or 1 in bit
format only.
Variable Names
Displays Variable/Comment dialog

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Step
Action
box. The address can be selected
from Variable/Comment declared in
the Variable/Comment dialog box.
R200
11/09
Event condition
Used to specify the condition to

make the user event occur. If rising
condition selected, the user event
occurs when the event address
value changes from 0 to 1. And if
falling condition selected, the user
event occurs when the event
address value changes from 1 to 0.
If transition condition selected, the
user event occurs whenever the
event address value changes.
Type
Used to specify the user event

type. An applicable type can be
selected among Information, Alarm
and Warning.
Message
Used to enter an event message.

The maximum length of the
message is 80 characters in
English). The event message input
is displayed with Event History
menu.
OK
Applies the changed items and

Cancel
Enter event address information, event conditions, event type and event
message. Or click the Variable/Comment to select the address from the
declared Variable/Comment.
Select the Associated addresss setting tab to specify the Associated

address. Associated address is used to capture the values of related address
including any values.

Honeywell
559
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Available
Displays the sum of the size of the

each associated address type
input, which is available up to 16
bytes.
Associated addresses Setup
Used to enter the associated

addresses. Up to 8 associated
addresses can be entered.
Click OK to save the entered items, or click Cancel to cancel it.
ATTENTION
Event type is specified by user based on the importance of the event and is
used as a classifying method of events for Event View.
560

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
For additional information on address type and display format, see section
on Variable/Comment. Also see section on Event History.
ATTENTION
If associated addresses are specified, the value of the associated

addresses is also recorded when applicable events happen.
Up to 8 associated addresses can be specified in up to 16 bytes

based on the data type of the address input. Supported data type and
its respective byte size are as shown as follows.
Type
Size
Type
Size
BIT
1 Byte
REAL
4 Bytes
USINT
1 Byte
LREAL
8 Bytes
UINT
2 Bytes
INT
2 Bytes
UDINT
4 Bytes
DINT
4 Bytes
ULINT
8 Bytes
LINT
8 Bytes
Up to 10 custom events are available for registration.
Editing Events
It is used to edit the user event items.
To edit a user event, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the event to edit.
Right-click and select Edit Event from the context menu.

Honeywell
561
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Step
Action
Make changes and click OK to save the changes, or click Cancel to cancel it.
Deleting Event
It deletes the user event input.
To delete an event, perform the following steps:
Step
562
Action
Select the event to delete.
Right-click on the event and select delete from the context menu.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Step
3
Action
Select Delete All from the context menu to delete all events.
Custom Event Capture

It is used to Enable or Disable event capture:
Corresponding to Custom Event Capture, click Enable, to capture the event, or select
Disable to disable the event capture.
Event Capture Setting

You can enable/disable each event from being displayed. To enable/display an event,
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the event to be enabled.
Select the checkbox corresponding to the event in the Enable column to

enable it. Clear the checkbox to disable it.

Honeywell
563
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Custom Event Copy/Paste

To Copy/Paste custom events, perform the following steps:
Step
1
Action
Select the event to copy.
Right click and select Copy from the context menu.

2
Move to the position to paste on and select Paste from the right-click context
menu.
The Event is pasted in the selected row.
Custom Event Cut/Paste

To Cut/Paste custom events, perform the following steps:
Step
1
564
Action
Select the event to cut.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Step
Action
Select Cut from the right-click context menu.
Move to the position to paste on.
Select Paste from the right-click context menu.
Save Event
Since the user defined event is saved in PLC, it is additionally saved to manage as files.
To save all the events, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select and event and click Save Event from the right-click context menu.
Enter a file name to save with on the File Save dialog box and click OK.
Open Event
It read user defined event setting from the file.
To open an event, perform the following steps:
R200
11/09

Honeywell
565
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Step
Action
On the Custom Event dialog box, right-click and select Open Event from the
context menu.
Select a file to read and then click OK.
ATTENTION
The event if opened is added to the list of current events.
A maximum of 10 custom events are added to the list.
Event History
Read the user event history saved in the PLC to display the details.
To view event history, perform the following steps:
Step
566
Action
Select Monitor>Custom Event.
Select the Event History tab on the user event dialog box.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Event History List
Displays the event history available on

the PLC.
Menu
Displays the event history-related

menu.
Apply PLC
Inactive on the event history page.
OK
Applies the changed items and closes

the dialog box.
Cancel
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
For additional information on event history item see section on

Detailed Event History View.

Honeywell
567
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
For additional information on an event history item, see section on Detailed
Event History.
Detailed Event History View

It displays the details of the event.
To view the details of an event, perform the following steps:
568
Step
Action
On the Custom Event dialog box, select the item to display its Event History.
Select Information.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Step
Action
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Date
Displays the date an event occurs in YearMonth-Date.
Time
Displays the time an event occurs in Hour:

Minute: Second: MS.
Condition
Displays event details specified in event

setting items.
Related address list
Displays the Associated address list and the

value when the event occurred. The display
format of the address value can be changed
by right-clicking on View in hexadecimal or

Honeywell
569
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Step
Action
View as specified.
Back
Displays the previous event history.
Next
Displays the next event history.
Copy
Copies the current event history.
Close
For additional information on an event history item, see section on Detailed
Event History.
Refresh
It updates the event history with recent details in PLC.
To refresh the event history, click Menu>Refresh on the Custom Event window.
Event Filtering
The history can be displayed on the event type. Select View All.
570

Honeywell
R200
11/09
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
Select View Information.
View Warning
Select View Warning.
View Alarm
R200
11/09
Select View Alarm.

Honeywell
571
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom Events
572

Honeywell
R200
11/09
13. Debugging
13.1 Start/Stop Debugging
Start Debugging
To start debugging, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
On the menu, select Online > Connect to connect to the PLC,
On the menu, select Online > Write to download the program to the PLC.
On the menu, select Online > Change Mode > Debug or

Debug > Start/Stop Debugging.
ATTENTION
Debug is unavailable if PLC operation is in Run mode.
This function is available only with PLC in online mode.
Debug function is available only when the SoftMaster program and PLC
program are identical. If they are not identical, download the applicable
program.
Monitoring function is also available in Debug mode.
If an error occurs on the PLC, Debug instruction does not work normally.
Clear the error to run the Debug instruction.
Stop Debugging
To stop debugging, perform the following steps:
R200
11/09
Step
Action
On the menu, select Online > Change Mode > Stop or Debug > Start/Stop
Debugging.
PLC ends Debug and come to the STOP mode.

Honeywell
573
13. Debugging
13.1. Start/Stop Debugging
ATTENTION
Even if Debug stops, Monitoring continues.
574

Honeywell
R200
11/09
13. Debugging
13.2. LD Program Debugging
13.2 LD Program Debugging

It is used to specify functions to debug the prepared LD program.
Set/Remove Breakpoints
It is used to set or remove the Breakpoint per step.
Set Breakpoint
To set Breakpoints, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Move the mouse cursor to the step to specify.
On the menu, select Debug > Set/Remove Breakpoints.

Honeywell
575
13. Debugging
Step
Action
ATTENTION
The break cannot be set on the area specified by a Block Mask

instruction.
Application instruction sets the breakpoint on the instruction String area.
Remove Breakpoint
To remove Breakpoints, perform eth following steps:
Step
1
576
Action
Move the Breakpoint to the step to remove.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
13. Debugging
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the menu, select Debug > Set/Remove Breakpoints.

Honeywell
577
13. Debugging
Go
It starts program debugging using the specified Breakpoint. With the Go function, the
program can be run up to the Breakpoint specified.
To run the program up to the specified Breakpoint, perform the following steps:
Step
578
Action
Select Debug > Go on the menu. The program runs until the breakpoint
complying until the condition is reached.
To go to the next Breakpoint, select Debug > Go on the menu.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
13. Debugging
Go to Cursor
It is used to make the program run up to the cursor position.
To run the program until the cursor position, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor to the position to run.
Select Debug > Go to the Cursor.

Honeywell
579
13. Debugging
Step Into
If the Breakpoint is engaged during debugging, its progress is made step by step. When
debugging program, Step Into, Step Out and Step Out functions is provided.
Step Into
It runs the program to the next step. If the current step is an application instruction CALL
with the running condition satisfied, it enters the subroutine block.
580
On the menu, select Debug > Step Into.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
13. Debugging
ATTENTION
If not with CALL instruction or if the CALL running condition is not satisfied,
the program runs to the next step.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
581
13. Debugging
Step Out
It is used to step out of the subroutine block once entered with Step into function
executed.
582
On the menu, select Debug > Step Out.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
13. Debugging
R200
11/09

Honeywell
583
13. Debugging
ATTENTION
584
If the currently debugged step is not inside the subroutine block, the
program is run to the next step.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
13. Debugging
Step Over
It is used to run the program to the next step. Unlike Step Into, even if the current step is
an application instruction CALL, it does not enter the subroutine block but run the
program to the next step.
R200
11/09
On the menu, select Debug > Step Over.

Honeywell
585
13. Debugging
586

Honeywell
R200
11/09
13. Debugging
13.3. List of Break Points
13.3 List of Break Points

The list shows all the Break Points being used in the program, where the user can decide
to use or delete the Break Point.
R200
11/09
On the menu, select Debug > Breakpoints List.
Use: If the breakpoint is deselected, it is not deleted from the list.
Program: displays the name of the program where the breakpoint is used.
Step: displays the Step number where the breakpoint is caught.
Count: After running the number of times as many as the specified steps where
the breakpoint is caught, PLC is braked. (Example; If the breakpoint is set inside
FOR 20 ~ NEXT with the number of times 10, FOR 20 ~NEXT is run 10 times
and then is braked.)
OK: saves the changed details and closes the dialog box.
Cancel: just closes the dialog box without saving the changed details.
Select All: checks all the listed items to allow.

Honeywell
587
13. Debugging
13.3. List of Break Points
Reset: cancels all the checked items previously allowed.
Go to: used to move to the position where the selected breakpoint is used.
Remove: deletes the selected breakpoints from the list.
Remove All: deletes all the breakpoints from the list.

ATTENTION
A maximum of 62 Breakpoints can be registered in the PLC.
588

Honeywell
R200
11/09
13. Debugging
13.4. Variable Break
13.4 Variable Break

Applicable debugging is available based on the data value and the application of the
variable.
Setting Variable Break
R200
11/09
On the menu, select Debug > Breakpoint Conditions > Variable Break point.
a)
Use the address as a variable break point: If the check in the box is
cancelled, the variable break even if saved, is not be used.
b)
Variable: shows the variable name used for variable break.
c)
Program: shows the program name of the variable used for variable break.
d)
Address: displays the address name if the variables memory is allocated in

the local variable.
e)
Comment: displays the comment if the variables comment is declared in the

local variable.
f)
Value Condition: If the selection is cancelled, the value even if saved, does
not make the value break engaged.
Honeywell
589
13. Debugging
g)
Value: if the specified address value is reached, the break is engaged. The
maximum/minimum value is based on the variable type.
h)
OK: saves the changed details and closes the dialog box.
i)
Cancel: just closes the dialog box without saving the changed details.
j)
Select Variable: finds a specific variable on the Variable list.
k)
Condition: makes the break engaged when writing the value on or reading the
value from address.
Variable Break Run

To set variable break run, perform the following steps:
Step
590
Action
Specify the variable break.
On the menu, select Debug > Go. PLC runs debugging.
If specified variable break conditions are met, a message is displayed to

inform that the variable break is engaged, when PLC stops running.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
13. Debugging
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
Among variable types, BYTE, NIBBLE and STRING do not support the
variable break instruction.
When the PLC is in debug mode, the meeting of any one condition
(breakpoint, variable break, scan break, etc.), applies the break.
Click on the program name to move to the program position where the
variable break is applied.
If the value is changed in other application programs (such as address

monitor) than the specified program, movement to the program position
where the variable break is applied may not be possible.

Honeywell
591
13. Debugging
13.5. Scan Break
13.5 Scan Break

This function is used to run PLC as many as the scan times specified, and apply the
break.
To use the Scan Break function, perform eth following steps:
Step
592
Action
On the menu, select Debug > Breakpoint Conditions
Select Scan Break point tab.
a)
Use Scan Break point: If the check in the box is cancelled, the specified scan
break times even if saved, is not run while PLC runs debugging.
b)
Scan Count: used to enter scan times to apply the break. 1 ~ 2147483647 is
available for the setting value.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
13. Debugging
13.5. Scan Break
Scan Break Run

To apply scan break, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Check Use Scan Break and specify the scan times to apply the break.
If Debug > Go is selected on the menu, PLC runs debugging.
PLC informs that the scan break is engaged after executed as many as
specified scan times.

Honeywell
593
13. Debugging
13.5. Scan Break
594

Honeywell
R200
11/09
14. Online Editing

14.1 Online Editing Sequence
This Online Editing function is used to edit the PLC program with PLC operation status
in RUN mode.
Open Project
Connect
Start Monitoring
Start
Online Editing
* Start Online Editing starts after active.
Edit
* Start Online Editing and Write Modified Program can be repeated.
Write Modified
Program
End Online Editing
R200
11/09

Honeywell
595
14. Online Editing

14.1. Online Editing Sequence
Open Project
On the menu, select Project > Open Project. Open the project identical to the
PLC project to perform Online Editing.
Or
On the menu, Select Project > Open from PLC.
On the menu, select Online > Connect to connect to the PLC.
Connect
Start Monitoring
On the menu, select Monitor > Start Monitoring.
Online Editing is available while monitoring.
Start/Stop Monitoring is available during Online Editing.
Start Online Editing
596
On the menu, select Online > Start Online Editing.
Online Editing is available after its program window is active and the program
is selected.
After Program or Variable is edited during Run, the program window changes to
edit mode during Run.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
14. Online Editing

If Online Editing starts, the background color of the program can be changed
through its applicable option.
Edit Online Editing is the same as specified in the off-line Edit.
In case of the LD, the edited rung is indicated with (*).
Edit
R200
11/09

Honeywell
597
14. Online Editing

Write Modified Program
On the menu, select Online > Write Modified Program.
The applicable program only is transferred to PLC.
In case of the LD, the edited rung is indicated with (*).
End Online Editing
598
On the menu, select Online > End Online Editing.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
14. Online Editing

ATTENTION
Project cannot be closed during Online Edit
One or more programs can be modified during Run.
While editing during Run, the monitoring value is not correct.
For the items to edit during Run, refer to the followings
(Edit Item means that add, delete and change are available)
Item
Project properties
Program
Global variable
Local variable
User-defined type
R200
11/09
Description
Edit
Add
Delete
Change
Add
Item
Description
Edit
User defined
function/function
block
Add
Delete
Change
LD
Edit
Delete
IL
Edit
Change
SFC
Edit
Add
Add
Delete
Delete
Change
Change
Add
Add
Delete
Change
SFC action (LD)
SFC Transition
(LD)
Delete
Change
Add
Parameter change
Edit
Delete
Local variable
retain setting
Edit
Change
Global variable
retain setting
Edit

Honeywell
599
14. Online Editing

600

Honeywell
R200
11/09
15. Printing
15.1 Print Project
Printing a Project
This instruction is used to print the contents of a project sequentially.
It is also used to select items to be printed, specify necessary setting options for printing
per item, and execute Preview and Print instruction.
To print the contents of a project, perform the followings steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the menu, select Project > Print Project.
Print Project dialog box appears.
Specify each item.

Honeywell
601
15. Printing
15.1. Print Project
Project Level Diagram: displays tree structure of the item printable in the Project.
Detailed setting functions are available in the tree structure of the Level Diagram. Print
and Previous View functions are available for the selected item.
h)
Print: prints the selected item in the Project Level Diagram.
i)
Save Selection Item: saves the selected item in the Project Level Diagram.
j)
Details: used to specify details of the selected item in the Project Level
Diagram.
k)
Preview: used to view the selected item previously to print in the Project
Level Diagram.
l)
Settings: sets the general print options such as Printer Setting, Print Page
Setting, Margin Setting, etc.
ATTENTION
Details button in the Project Level Tree is enabled only if Cover,

Program, I/O parameter are selected.
Refer to each print option for setting each detailed item. (Program
Print Setting Refer to Program Print)
Address and Memory Reference used in the Project Level Diagram

are identical to those on the window displayed when View > Used
Address and View > Cross Reference are executed on the menu.
Print Setting
It is used to specify paper to print on and the printer.
Click Settings>Page Setup on the Print Project dialog box or right click on the
Print Project dialog box and select Page Setup from the context menu.
602
a)
Details: Refer to Print Setting for each item.
b)
Page Setting: used to specify paper to print on.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
15. Printing
15.1. Print Project
c)
Header/Footer: used to enter String displayed on the Header and Footer
Page Setup
It is used to specify margins of paper to print.
To specify the Page setup, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Click Printer Settings on the main Print dialog box or right-click the mouse
the a. Project Level Diagram.
On the menu, select Page Setup.
Where the selected paper and layout of margins can be viewed previously.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
603
15. Printing
15.1. Print Project
Step
Action
Used to select paper to print on.
Used to select a printing direction.
Back to Default: details of Margins, Header and Footer are changed back
to default, the basic value specified when the program installed

Margin Setting: specifies margins of paper printed.
Printer: used to change the setting options of the printer.
ATTENTION
Ensure that print contents do not overwrite with header or footer

when printed, with respect to margins.
If there are no contents in header/footer, the header/footer is not

printed.
Header/Footer Setting
It is used to specify the content of Header/Footer.
Content Setting: used to enter the content in the left/center/right of the Header/Footer.
604

Honeywell
R200
11/09
15. Printing
15.1. Print Project
a)
R200
11/09
Insert Field: used to insert the field into the position of the cursor currently
placed on the Edit Box (left, center, right).

Honeywell
605
15. Printing
15.1. Print Project
ATTENTION
- If the content of the header/footer is long, the header/footer in the

left, center or right may be printed as overwritten with each other.
- The user can specify the content of the header/footer using Input
and Field at the same time.
Example) If the content of The date today is &d is input on the
header/footer The date today is 2004-06-01is printed.
Field Content
Date: &d yyyy-mm-dd
Time: &t hh:mm:ss
Project name: &p
PLC name: &c
PLC type: &T
Page number/Total Page number: &n Page number/Total Page

number of the selected items
Page number/Item page number: &N Page number/Item page

number of one item
Program name: &P displayed only in program print mode.
File Name: &f file name of the current project
Path and file name: &F file name displayed with its directory route.
Project comment: &C Project comment is printed if any. The

comment if too long may not be correctly printed.
Cover Setup
It is used to specify the print cover.
To specify the print cover, perform eth following steps:
606
Step
Action
Select Cover in the Project Level Diagram on the Print Project dialog Box.
Right-click Cover and select Details or click or press Enter key.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
15. Printing
15.1. Print Project
Step
Action
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Cover Paper
Default is A4 vertical. Printed differently based

on the paper setup. If the Edit Box exceeds
the paper, the exceeded area is not printed.
Margin Display
Displays the specified margins with a dotted

line.
Edit Box
Displays the content printed on the cover,

where the content, font and position can be
changed.
Edit
Used to edit the content of the currently

selected Edit Box. Double-click the mouse on
Edit Box or press Enter key when the Edit
Honeywell
607
15. Printing
15.1. Print Project
Step
Action
Box is selected to edit. If the Field is inserted,
Edit is also available.
Font
Changes font of the currently selected Edit

Box.
Add
Adds a new Edit Box to the print cover.
Delete
Deletes the currently selected Edit Box.
OK

dialog box.
Cancel
Add Content
To add content, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Click Add.
Move the mouse on the paper.
The mouse cursor changes.
Click on the paper to view an Edit dialog box as in the following figure.
6
608
Pressing ESC changes the mouse cursor to the arrow shape again.
Honeywell
R200
11/09
15. Printing
15.1. Print Project
ATTENTION
Edit Box can be aligned in the paper and the Edit Box.
It is available through the menu displayed by the right mouse button

clicked on the paper.
R200
11/09
Edit Box > Center: aligns the selected Edit Box on the center of
paper.
String > left Align: aligns the content of the selected Edit Box on
the left in the Edit Box.
The edge of the Edit Box is not printed.
Edit Box can be moved by Drag and Drop instruction of the mouse
or with the arrow keys.
Undo and Redo are not available.
If string including field is previously viewed, the field is displayed as

analyzed. If edited, the field is displayed back.

Honeywell
609
15. Printing
15.2. LD Program Print
15.2 LD Program Print

It is used to print the selected LD program.
Print Setting
To configure the print setting, perform the following steps:
Step
610
Action
Select the program item to print.
On the menu, select Project > Print.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
15. Printing
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Select Program
Selects a program to print. In LD program, IL

program print cannot be selected.
View Options
Used to specify View Options for printing. Refer

section on Viewing Program Options for each
View Option.
Contact
Used to specify the number of contacts in a line.

The number of contact is fixed to the number
currently displayed if printing is executed in the
LD program.
Print Range
Used to specify print range.
Print in Color
Used to decide to apply Color print or not. If the

check box is selected, the print is in color, and if
not, it is in black-and-white.
Print Grid
Used to decide to apply Grid Print or not.
Print Output
Comment
Used to print output comment.
Print
Starts to print with the currently specified

options applied.
OK
Applies the currently specified options and

Cancel
Print Setting
Used to specify the printer setup options.
Page Setting
Used to call Page setup dialog box. The size of

paper and space of print page can be setup in
the Page Setup dialog box.
ATTENTION
When printing the project, click Details after selecting the program name to
set print setup.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
611
15. Printing
Print Preview
It is used to see a preview of the specified print job.
612
On the menu, select Project > Preview.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
16. User Function/Function Block

16.1 Overview
You can personally create and use a function/function block, which is not provided by
SoftMaster. The User Function/Function Block can be created as follows.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
613

16.2. Create User Function/Function Block
16.2 Create User Function/Function Block

Create User Function/Function Block Program
Perform the following steps to create a User Function/Function Block.
Step
1
Action
Select Project > Add Item >-Function.
Or,
Select Project > Add Item > Function Block.
The following screen appears.
Program Name: Used for entering a User Function/Function Block. When the
614

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Step
Action
user-defined function/function is registered, the input name is registered.
Language: Used for selecting a programming language for the User
Function/Function Block. A user-defined function is created only by the LD
language while a user-defined function block can be created by the LD, SFC
or ST language.
Use EN/ENO: Used for selecting whether to use or not EN/ENO, which is
used under the operation condition of function/function block. If not selecting
EN/ENO, you should declare BOOL type variable in the first input and first
output parameters of the function/function block.
Return Data Type: Designates a type of the results after a user-defined
function is executed. It is activated only when a user-defined function is
created.
Program description: Used for entering the comment of a User
Function/Function Block. Do not enter comment if unnecessary.
OK: Saves the input in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.
Cancel: Cancels the input in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.
ATTENTION
If you click OK, a new item with the name input in the item of User
Function/Function Block is created.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
615

Step
616
Action

Honeywell
R200
11/09

16.3. Create User Function/Function Block I/O Variable
16.3 Create User Function/Function Block I/O Variable

Perform the following steps to create a user function/function block I/O variable.
Step
Action
Double-click a local variable among the items created with the name of User
Function/Function Block, the following local variable screen is created.
R200
11/09
a)
VAR_RETURN: A type of variable representing the value of user-defined

function. It is automatically created as a variable with the same name of
the user-defined function with return type designated when creating a
user-defined function.
b)
Function type: Used to automatically display input variable, I/O variable,

function/function block type by output variable in the local variable
screen. The type is as same as when using the User Function/Function
Block in the scan program.
Add input variable, I/O variable and output value in the local variable screen.
Depending on the added I/O variables, the function/function block type is
automatically changed on the bottom of the local variable screen.

Honeywell
617

16.3. Create User Function/Function Block I/O Variable
Step
Action
ATTENTION
Minimum Input variable and output variable must be at least one.
But, the maximum number is limited to 32.
618

Honeywell
R200
11/09

16.4. User Function/Function Block Programming
16.4 User Function/Function Block Programming

Perform the following steps to create a user function/function block programming.
Step
1
Action
Double-click a program among the items created with the newly input name
in the User Function/Function Block, a program screen with the previously
designated language appears.
The following screen shows the screen created when selecting the LD.
R200
11/09
Create a program, based on the variable input in the local variable screen.

Honeywell
619

Step
620
Action

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Step
Action
ATTENTION
If local variable edit and program edit are finished, select
function/function block toolbar instruction to check whether the
edited User Function/Function Block is registered.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
621

16.5. Working with User Function/Function Block
16.5 Working with User Function/Function Block

Perform the following steps to use user function/function block.
Step
622
Action
Open the program to use a User Function/Function Block and move the
cursor to the position to input.
Click Function/Function Block Toolbar.
Select a User Function/Function Block in the function/function block dialog

box.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Step
R200
11/09
Action
Enter the variable to be used in the input/output of function/function block.

Honeywell
623

Step
624
Action

Honeywell
R200
11/09
17. SoftMaster Simulator

17.1 Overview of the SoftMaster Simulator (SIM)
Features of SoftMaster-SIM
SoftMaster-SIM is a simulated PLC for MasterLogic PLC series. If using the SoftMasterSIM, you can run your program without the PLC, or you can debug a PLC program by
using input condition setting or module simulation function.
SoftMaster-SIM supports the following function:
1.
Program simulation
You can simulate the program written by LD/SFC/ST in the SoftMaster. It supports
online editing by which you can edit during RUN mode and debugging function by
which you can trace the program as step unit.
PLC online function
You can use program monitoring function and online diagnosis function such as system
monitoring, address monitoring, trend monitoring, data trace and custom events.
Module simulation
You can simulate the digital I/O module, A/D conversion module, D/A conversion
module, counter, Temperature control module, positioning module. By using simulation
function, you can set the input value of each module.
I/O input condition setting
You can set address value by setting specific address value or channel value of the
module as input condition. If you use I/O input condition setting, you need not write
other program to test PLC program.
System configuration for execution of SoftMaster-SIM
The system configuration required by SoftMaster-SIM is higher than that of SoftMaster.
Minimum specification: Pentium 3 900MHz, RAM 256MB
Recommended specification: Pentium 4 1.5GHz, RAM 512MB more
R200
11/09

Honeywell
625

17.1. Overview of the SoftMaster Simulator (SIM)
ATTENTION
In case of minimum specification, the fixed period scan may not operate
properly because scan period may be longer than the fixed period and
disconnection may occur. Despite using recommended specification, if
system load is heavy, same phenomenon may occur. And regardless of
system specification, according to user setting like systems SLEEP mode,
disconnection can occur.
When using fixed period, fixed period error/warning dialog box may not be
displayed.
Starting SoftMaster-SIM
To start SoftMaster-SIM, perform the following steps:
Step
626
Action
Start SoftMaster and write the program to execute through the SoftMasterSIM.
On the SoftMaster menu, select Tools > Start Simulator. If SoftMaster-SIM

is executed, the program is downloaded into SoftMaster-SIM automatically. If
SoftMaster-SIM is executed, status becomes online, connection, stop.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Step
Action
On the menu, select Online > Change Mode > Run and execute the
downloaded program. When using SoftMaster-SIM, for online menu
supported by SoftMaster, refer to the following table.
Menu items
R200
11/09
support
Menu items
support
Open from PLC
Fault Mask
Change Mode (Run)
Module changing
Wizard
Change Mode (Stop)
Start online editing
Change Mode (Debug)
Write Modified program
Disconnect
End online editing
Read
Start/Stop monitoring
Write
Pause
Compare with PLC
Resume
Set Flash Memory (Set)
Pausing conditions
Set Flash Memory

(Remove)
Change current value
Reset PLC
System monitoring
Clear PLC
Address monitoring
PLC Information (CPU)
Special module
monitoring

Honeywell
627

Menu items
628
support
Menu items
support
PLC Information
(Performance)
Custom events
PLC Information
(Password)
Data traces
PLC Information (PLC

RTC)
Start/stop debugging
PLC History (Error Log)
Debug (Go)
PLC History (Mode

Log)
Debug (Step Over)
PLC History (Shut down

Log)
Debug (Step Into)
PLC History (System

Log)
Debug (Step Out)
PLC errors/warnings
Debug (Go to Cursor)
I/O Information
Set/Remove
Breakpoints
Force I/O
Breakpoints List
Skip I/O
Breakpoint conditions

Honeywell
R200
11/09

17.2. Program window configuration
17.2 Program window configuration

Configuring the Program window
The following figure displays the typical SoftMaster-SIM screen.
1.
Channel list
Displays favorite channels according to module and channel. In case of module, displays
only module set in I/O parameter. In module, B0 means base no. and S00 means slot no.
2.
I/O condition
Displays single I/O condition and continuous I/O condition.

Displays simulators status.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
629

Status
Description
Initial conditions
Displays initial status. Connection by

simulator is not available.
Connection
available
It means connection is ready and

turns on red LED.
Single I/O condition

execution
It means Single I/O condition is

under execution. Under execution,
green LED flickers.
Continuous I/O
condition execution
Window
It means Continuous I/O is under

execution. Under execution, yellow
LED flicker.
Channel list
Module channel
In tree view, double-click the channel you want to read. If you use specific channel as
favorite channel, check favorite channel box.
630

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Channel monitor
Perform the following steps to monitor a channel.
Step
Action
Start monitoring:
1
On the menu, select Tool > Start channel monitoring.
Modify channel current value
R200
11/09
Select channel you want to modify current value.
In the selected channel, move to the current value column
Double-click or press Enter and displays Channel Value Modification dialog

box.

Honeywell
631

Step
Action
Module Name: displays the module name.
Channel Name: displays the channel name.
Channel type: displays the data type of the selected channel.
Bit value: in case of bit type, select off/on.
Input Value: in case of not bit type, input the value directly.
In case that value is output value, you can not change the current value of
each channel.
Stop channel monitoring:
On the menu, select Tool > Stop channel monitoring.
I/O condition
I/O condition is used to write a specific value to specific address when specific condition
is met by user input. For example, If address %IX0.0.0 become 1, set address
%MX0~%MX100 as 1.
The user should modify address value periodically by using the monitor current value of
SoftMaster or write other PLC program to test PLC program. SoftMaster-SIM support
reflects the data yielded to a module or entered from a module to a program.
Condition expression
Displays condition expression used in the single input condition and continuous
condition. One condition expression consists of more than one condition by combination
of conditions.
Type
Comparison
632
Operator
Priority
Contents
==
Equal
!=
Not equal
>
Greater than
>=
Greater than or equal to
<=
Less than or equal to
<
Less than
Honeywell
R200
11/09

Type
Numerical
operation
Bit
operation
Logical
operation
ETC.
Operator
Priority
Contents
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Division
&
12
Bit multiply
13
Bit sum
14
Exclusive bit sum
&&
10
Logical multiply
||
11
Logical sum
Comparison target is address or channel.

For example, If you write address %MW0 is larger than 100 and %M10 is on as
condition expression, the condition expression is as follows.
(%MW0 > 100) && (%MX10 == TRUE)
It supports 5 addresses such as %I, %Q, %M, %R, %W.
Basic functions
Single I/O condition and continuous I/O has the following interface.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
633

Adding I/O condition

To add an I/O condition, perform eth following steps:
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the position to add a new I/O condition.
On the menu, select Edit > Properties.
Edit I/O condition and click OK.
Edit I/O condition

To Edit an I/O condition, perform the following steps:
Step
634
Action
Select an I/O condition to edit.
On the menu, select Edit > Properties.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Step
3
Action
Modify the items in the I/O condition dialog and click OK.
Cut/Paste I/O condition

To Cut/Paste an I/O condition, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select I/O condition to cut.
Move to the position to paste, on the menu, select Edit > Paste.
Copy/Paste I/O condition

To Copy/Paste an I/O condition:
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
Select I//O condition to copy.
Honeywell
635

Step
Action
Move to position to paste, on the menu, select Edit > Paste.
Delete I/O condition

To delete an I/O condition:
Step
636
Action
Select I/O condition to delete.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Step
Action
Insert Line
To insert a line, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select line to insert.
On the menu, select Edit > Insert Line.
Delete Line
To delete a line, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the position you want to delete.
On the menu, select Edit > Delete Line.

Honeywell
637

Step
Action
Single I/O condition

In single I/O condition, if execution option is satisfied, copy the value to the selected
Address/Channel.
638

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Use condition
Used to decide if you use I/O condition. If you do not

enable this, SoftMaster-SIM does not use the
condition set by user.
Name
Used to enter I/O conditions name.
Description
Used to enter a description about I/O condition.
Always execute
Regardless of condition set by user, it executes

Output Setting when it start.
Execution by button
Executes Output Setting when pressing the button.
Execution by condition
expression
Executes Output Setting when it satisfies the

condition expression set by user.
View Channel Browser
Displays channel browser. It is activated when

selecting the Execution by condition expression.
a)
Address/Channel: Inputs channel or address name to register.
b)
Set value: Inputs setting value. Address, channel, constant is available.

Honeywell
639

Continuous I/O condition

In the continuous I/O condition, when the condition is met, enter the value to the selected
address/channel in every scan continuously.
Field Label
640
Description
Use condition
Used to decide if you use I/O condition. If you do not

enable this, SoftMaster-SIM does not use the
condition set by user.
Name
Used to enter name of the I/O condition.
Description
Used to enter a description of the I/O condition.
Always execute
Regardless of condition set by user, it executes

Output Setting when it starts.
Execution by button
Used to execute the Output Setting when pressing

the button.
Execution by condition
expression
It executes Output Setting when it meets the

condition expression set by user.
Displays channel browser. It is activated when

selecting the Execution by condition.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Field Label
R200
11/09
Description
Repeated Execution
Select if you input the output value repeatedly.
Ignore Condition
while execution
Select whether checking the operating condition or not.
Output setting
Displays continuous value setting dialog box.

Honeywell
641

ATTENTION
When setting continuous I/O, it writes the value in the continuous value
setting to each address/channel in order. If the Ignore Condition set during
execution, only the first value is written. If Always Execute is set, all the
values are written in sequence. And if you set repeated value, it writes value
repeatedly.
Continuous value
no.
Value
For example,
not setting Ignore Condition while execution/ not setting Repeated
Execution (Execution by button / condition expression is false)
77777777
not setting Ignore Condition while execution/ not setting Repeated
Execution (Always execution / condition is true)
7654321
setting Ignore Condition while execution / not setting Repeated Execution
7654321
not setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution
(Execution by button / condition expression is false)
77777777777777
642

Honeywell
R200
11/09

not setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution

(always execution / condition is true)
76543217654321
setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution
76543217654321
Continuous Value Setting dialog box

Input setting value
Enter the value to set as output value in the continuous I/O condition.
Field Label
R200
11/09
Description

Honeywell
643

Address/channel
Enter the address or channel to set value.
Value
Enter only constant such as integer, real,

hexadecimal.
OK
Saves it and closes dialog box.
Cancel
Cancels input category.
Set continuous value

Select address or channel to enter continuous value.
To enter a continuous value, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Double-click the column to enter address/channel.
Address/channel input dialog appears.
Enter address or channel and click OK.
Field Label
Description
Channel/Address Name
Used to enter channel or address.
Displays the channel browser.
OK
Saves it and closes dialog box.
Cancel
Cancels input category.
Input value
To enter values, perform the following steps:
644

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Step
Action
On the Continuous Value Setting dialog, move the cursor to the position to
enter the value.
Enter the value.
Auto fill
To Auto fill, perform the following steps:
Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the Continuous Value Setting dialog, select the area to be copied.
Move the cursor to the corner, cursor changes.
Drag the cursor down with left mouse button pressed.

Honeywell
645

Step
Action
ATTENTION
If you use control key when auto fill, you can input
increased/decreased value according to mouse drag direction.
I/O condition monitor

Start monitoring
646
On the menu, select Tools > Use single I/O condition or Tools > Use continuous
I/O condition.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

End monitoring
To end monitoring, perform the following steps:
On the menu, Cancel Tools > Use single I/O condition or Tools > Use continuous
I/O condition.
ATTENTION
Program is executed from first step to last step repeatedly and we call this
process as scan program. SoftMaster-SIM is also executed through scan and
has the following process.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
647

Module simulation
SoftMaster-SIM supports simple simulation function for the I/O module and special
module. In case of digital I/O module, it supports I/O function about I or Q area and in
case of special module it supports monitoring function such as analog input or output
value monitoring.
Setting of module
All simulation function in the SoftMaster-SIM use information set in the I/O parameter.
Hence, ensure that you set each module in the I/O parameter to simulate module and
reflect it to program.
For example, in order to simulate the following PLC system, set the I/O parameter as
follows.
Base
Slot
Module name
Module type
DC 2
Basic base
2MLI-D21A
Basic base
2MLF-AV8A
Voltage type A/D

conversion module (8
channels)
Basic base
2MLF-HO2A
Open collector type

high speed module (2
channels)
4V input 8 points
After executing the SoftMaster-SIM, the module set in the I/O parameter are displayed as
follows in System Monitoring.
648

Honeywell
R200
11/09

ATTENTION
To apply I/O parameter set in the SoftMaster, download I/O parameter to
SoftMaster-SIM. In case the module has been changed, re-launch
SoftMaster-SIM module changes, execute the SoftMaster-SIM again.
Digital I/O module

In the digital I/O modules simulation, you can change contact points current value or
check if output is normal. According to I/O module setting in I/O parameter, it has the
following characteristics.
Not setting I/O module
Setting I/O module
Modification of input value
Modification of the
monitor current value is
available.
Modification of the
SoftMaster-SIM channel
value is available.
Modification of output
value
Not available
Not available
Forced I/O input
Not applied
Applied
Not applied
Applied
Analog input module (A/D conversion module)

SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog input module.
Module name
R200
11/09
Support
2MLF-AV8A (Voltage type 8 channel)
2MLF-AC8A (Current type 8 channel)

Honeywell
649

2MLF-AD4S (Insulation type 4 channel)
SoftMaster-SIM supports four types of input voltage range and digital data output format
and two types of input current range. It is as follows.
Input voltage range
Input current range
Digital data output

format
1 ~ 5V
4 ~ 20mA
0 ~ 16000
0 ~ 5V
0 ~ 20mA
-8000 ~ 8000
0 ~ 10V
1000 ~ 5000
-10 ~ 10V
0 ~ 10000 (%)
SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog input parameter.

Parameter
Support
Parameter
Support
Operation channel
Filter constant
Input voltage(current)
range
Filter process
Output data type
Average method
Filter process
Average value
You can set analog input value in the SoftMaster-SIM window and input range is
effective within voltage (current) set in parameter.
ATTENTION
For the analog modules parameter setting and how to program, refer to the
user manual of each module.
You can set the analog input value in the SoftMaster-SIM window
650

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Analog output module (D/A conversion module)

SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog output module.
Module name
Support
2MLF-DV4A (Voltage type 4 channel)
2MLF -DV8A (Voltage type 8 channel)
2MLF -DC4A (Current type 4 channel)
2MLF -DC8A (Current type 8 channel)
2MLF -DV4S(Insulation type voltage

output 4 channel)
2MLF -DC4S(insulation type current

output 4 channel)
SoftMaster-SIM supports the following voltage (current) range and input data type.
Input data type
Output voltage range
Output current range
0 ~ 16000
1 ~ 5V
4 ~ 20mA
-8000 ~ 8000
0 ~ 5V
0 ~ 20mA
1000 ~ 5000
0 ~ 10V
0 ~ 10000 (%)
-10 ~ 10V
SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog output parameter.

Parameter
Support
Operation channel
Output voltage (current) range
Input data type
Channel output status
You can input digital input value through special module variable and it is effective
within the range set in parameter.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
651

ATTENTION
For analog output modules parameter and how to program, refer to the user
manual of each module.
You can check the changed analog output value in the SoftMaster-SIM windows
channel item.
High Speed counter module (HSC Module)

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following high speed counter module.
Module Name
Support
2MLF -HO2A (Open collector 2 channel)
2MLF -HD2A (Open driver 2 channel)
The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following high speed counter parameter.

Parameter
652
Support
Parameter
Support
Count mode
Comparison output 0 maximum

setting value
Pulse input mode
Comparison output 1 minimum

setting value
Preset
Comparison output 0 maximum

setting value
Ring counter minimum value
Output status setting
Ring counter maximum value
Additional function mode
Comparison output 0 mode
Section setting value (ms)

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Parameter
Support
Parameter
Support
Comparison output 1 mode
Pulse number per 1 cycle
Comparison output 0
minimum setting value
Frequency display mode
ATTENTION
For parameter specific contents of high speed counter module and

how to program, refer to the user manual of each module.
In the SoftMaster-SIM windows channel item, you can change current count value. High
speed counter simulation compare the inputted count value with parameter setting value
and use it as comparison output signal.
RTD module
The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following RTD module.
Module name
Support
2MLF -RD4A (4 channel)
2MLF -RD4S (insulation type 4 channels)
2MLF -TC4S (insulation type 4 channels)
The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following temperature input parameter.

Parameter
R200
11/09
Support
Parameter
Support
Operation channel
Process Alarm High-High Limit
Sensor type
Process Alarm High Limit
Temperature unit
Process Alarm Low Limit
Filter constant
Process Alarm Low-Low Limit

Honeywell
653

Parameter
Support
Parameter
Support
Average process
Process Alarm Hysteresis
Average value
Input variation alarm setting

type
Scaling data type
Input variation alarm Upper

Limit
Scaling minimum value
Input variation alarm Lower

Limit
Scaling maximum value
Input variation alarm detection

Cycle
ATTENTION
For parameter specific content of RTD module and how to program, see the
user manual of each module.
You can set temperature input value in the SoftMaster-SIM windows channel item.
Advanced positioning module (APM module)

ATTENTION
In the SoftMaster-SIM, it cant support the full function of APM function. The
APM module of SoftMaster-SIM is made to help you understand the function
block related with APM and its program operation and error may be different
with real PLC. And because SoftMaster-SIM supports part of error related
with APM, some error may be occur in real PLC. The following is APM
function block list that SoftMaster-SIM supports.
For position module supported by SoftMaster-SIM, refer to the following table.

Module name
654

Honeywell
Support
R200
11/09

2MLF -PO1A (Open collector 1 axis)
2MLF -PD1A (Line Driver 1 axis)
The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following step data parameter (X/Y/Z axis).
Parameter
Support
Parameter
Support
Coordinate
Circular interpolation sub

address [pulse]
Control Method
M code
Operation Pattern
ACC/DEC No.
Operation method
Operation speed
Target position [pulse]
Dwell time
Circular interpolation
direction
The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following operating parameter (X/Y/Z axis).

Parameter type
Item
Basic parameter
Bias speed
Extension parameter
External command selection
External command
External stop
External contemporary start
External speed/position
conversion
Origin address
Origin/Manual parameter
R200
11/09
Support

Honeywell
655

Origin/Manual parameter
Home High speed
Home Low speed
JOG High speed
JOG Low speed
Inching speed
The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following APM exclusive function block..
656

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Function block
R200
11/09
Command
Support
APM_ORG
Homing start
APM_FLT
Floating origin setting
APM_DST
Direct start
APM_IST
Indirect start
APM_LIN
Linear interpolation start
APM_CIN
Circular interpolation start
APM_SST
Simultaneous start
APM_VTP
Speed/position
conversion
APM_PTV
Position/speed conversion
APM_STP
Stop
APM_SKP
Skip operation
APM_SSP
Position Sync.
APM_SSS
Speed Sync.
APM_POR
Position override
APM_SOR
Speed override
APM_PSO
Speed override with

position
APM_NMV
Continuous operation
APM_INCH
Inching start
APM_RTP
Manual operation
previous location return
APM_SNS
Start step no. modification
APM_SRS
Repeated step no.

modification
APM_MOF
M code off
APM_PRS
Current position preset

Honeywell
657

Function block
Command
Support
APM_ZONE
ZONE output allowance
APM_EPRS
Encoder preset
Teaching function block
APM_EMG
Emergency stop
APM_CLR
Error reset
APM_PST
Point operation
APM_PWR
Point operation step data

setting
APM_SRD
Read current status
APM_CRD
Read operation status

code information
APM_ENCRD
Read encoder value
APM_JOG
JOG start
APM_MPG
Manual pulse operation
The following is APM command error code in the SoftMaster-SIM.

Error code
658
Meaning
151
Operating datas operating speed can not

be set as 0.
221
Direct start command can not be

executed during operation
224
Direct start command can not be

executed in the absolute coordinate of
zero point non-determination status.
231
Indirect start command can not be

executed during operation.
234
Indirect start command can not be


Honeywell
R200
11/09

Error code
R200
11/09
Meaning
291
Contemporary start command can not be

294
Contemporary start command can not be

321
Decreased speed stop command can be

331
Skip command can be executed during

operation.
355
There is error in the setting of speed

synchronous commands master/slave
axis.
356
There is error in the setting of speed

synchronous commands master/slave
axis rate.
361
Position override command can be

371
Speed override command can be

391
Continuous operation command can be

401
Inching command can not be executed

during operation.
431
Auto operation point return command can

not be executed during operation.
441
Start step no. modification command can

not be executed during operation.
461
Position teaching command can not be

481
Inner emergency stop

Honeywell
659

ATTENTION
Positioning module specific parameter is set in the APM package. To

set parameter used in the positioning module, set operating
parameter in the APM package and save project file as follows. And
APM project file should be in the SoftMaster project file folder.
BxSyz.apm (x base number, yz slot number, no distinction between small and

capital letters)
Base
Slot
Project storage
name
B0S0.apm
10
B0S10.apm
B1S0.apm
11
B1S11.apm
B2S0.apm
12
B2S12.apm
For specific parameter setting of APM module, refer to the APM

package user manual.
You can check APM modules status in the SoftMaster-SIM windows channel item.
660

Honeywell
R200
11/09

ATTENTION
Meaning of channel name of positioning module is as follows

(Example: X axis standard)
Channel name
R200
11/09
Meaning
XCurrentPosH
Upper 16 bit among X

axis current position
value
XCurrentPosL
Lower16 bit among X

axis current position
value
XCurrentVelH
Upper 16 bit among X

axis current speed value
XCurrentVelL
Lower 16 bit among X

axis current speed value

Honeywell
661

17.3. Limitations
17.3 Limitations
SoftMaster-SIM has the following limitations in comparison with real PLC.
Watchdog timer
In 2MLI PLC, we set watchdog timer to prevent error. But in SoftMaster-SIM, it doesnt
work properly because scan time in SoftMaster-SIM is longer than that in PLC.
Communication module
SoftMaster-SIM dont support function related with communication module. So the
following function block doesnt work and just saved in SoftMaster-SIM.
Category
662
Name
Function
Station address setting
P2PSN
Sets other station address
Reading area setting

(BOOL)
P2PRD_BOOL
Sets BIT data reading

area

(BYTE)
P2PRD_BYTE
Sets BYTE data reading

area

(WORD)
P2PRD_WORD
Sets WORD data reading

area

(DWORD)
P2PRD_DWORD
Sets DWORD data

reading area

(LWORD)
P2PRD_LWORD
Sets LWORD data

reading area
Writing area setting

(BOOL)
P2PWR_BOOL
Sets BIT data writing area

(BYTE)
P2PWR_BYTE
Sets BYTE data writing

area

(WORD)
P2PWR_WORD
Sets WORD data writing

area

(DWORD)
P2PWR_DWORD
Sets DWORD data writing

area

(LWORD)
P2PWR_LWORD
Sets LWORD data writing

area

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
18.1 Writing ST program
ST based on character is program language and conforms to IEC 61131-3.
Scan program, user function/FB, SFC can be written by ST language.
Adding Scan Program
Perform the following steps to add a scan program.
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Scan Program in the project window.
Select Project > Add item > Program.

Honeywell
663
18. ST Edition
18.1. Writing ST program
Step
Action
Select ST in Language in the above screen and enter program name and
description.
Adding User Function/Function Block

Perform the following steps to add a user function/function block.
Step
1
664
Action
Select User Function/Function Block in the project window.
Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Project > Add Item > Function or Function Block.
Enter the name and description. Select ST in Language. In case of Function,

select Return data type.

Honeywell
665
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
Adding SFC transition, action

Adding SFC Transition
Perform the following steps to add transition.
Step
666
Action
Select transition in which you want to input program in SFC program.
After selecting transition, double-click it or press Enter.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
Enter the name and comment.
Select Program in Type.
Select ST as Language in Add Program window.
Perform the following steps to add an action.

Step
R200
11/09
Action
Enter the Name and Comment.
Select Program in Type in the Action Properties window.

Honeywell
667
18. ST Edition
Step
668
Action
Select ST as Language in the Add Program window.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
18.2. Limit
18.2 Limit
When editing ST language, there is the limit as described below.
Item
Content
Maximum number
of character in one
line
Maximum number of character in one line is

2,048 for English and 1,024 for Korean.
Limit
2,048
ATTENTION
R200
11/09
Only one scan program is available.
Language of User Function/Function Block, SFC transition and action

can be different with language of scan program.
Program cannot be converted into program written other languages.

Honeywell
669
18. ST Edition
18.3. Editing Program
18.3 Editing Program

Shortcut keys
The followings are the shortcut keys.
You can change shortcut key using Tools > Shortcut key Settings.
Action
Shortcut key
Description
Copy
Ctrl + C
Copies selected character string.
Paste
Ctrl + V
Pastes copied character string.
Delete
Del
Deletes selected character string.
Cut
Ctrl + X
Copies selected character string and deletes it.
Undo
Ctrl + Z
Cancels edition.
Redo
Ctrl + Y
Cancels Redo action.
Select All
Ctrl + A
Selects all character strings.
The followings are shortcut key about movement. You cannot change the following
shortcut keys.
Shortcut key
670
Description
Home
Goes to start of line.
Ctrl + Home
Goes to start of program.
Moves cursor to right one space.
Moves cursor to left one space.
Moves cursor to upper line.
Moves cursor to lower line.
End
Goes to end of line.
Page up
Goes to upper one page.
Page down
Goes to lower one page.
Ctrl + End
Goes to end of edited line.
Ctrl +
Goes to start of next word.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
Shortcut key
Description
Ctrl +
Goes to start of previous word.
Ctrl + Del
Deletes by start of next word.
Ctrl + BS
Deletes by start of current word.
Shift + Move
Selects from current cursor location to location to move.
ATTENTION
The described shortcut key is based on default of SoftMaster.
For user defined- shortcut key, refer to section Shortcut Keys.
Copy/Paste
Copies selected character string into clipboard and pastes it.
Perform the following steps to copy and paste the character string.
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select the character string to copy.
Select Edit > Copy.
Move to location to paste the copied character string.
Select Edit > Paste.

Honeywell
671
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
ATTENTION
Clipboard: memory area of PC to save temporary information.
When parting, if you select the area, the character string is

overwritten and if you do not select the area, it is inserted.
Only text is pasted.
Undo/Redo
Undo cancels edition and Redo cancels Undo action.
Perform the following steps to do Undo and Redo actions.
Step
1
Action
After executing Paste, select Edit > Undo.
Pasted contents are deleted.
Select Edit > Redo.

Paste action is executed again.
672

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
Adding/Selecting variable
Enter a variable at the selected location.
Perform the following steps to add or select variable.
Step
1
Action
After moving the cursor, select Edit > Select/Add Variable.
a)
R200
11/09
Variable: Enter name of direct variable or declared variable. If the

entered character string is variable type and is not registered as variable,
Variable Addition/Edit dialog box shows.

Honeywell
673
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
b)
Local variable: Displays the declared local variable list.
c)
Direct variable: Displays direct variable comment.
d)
Flag: Displays flag in the list. Type of flag list can be selected in List.
e)
List: Displays type of flag list. There is system/High speed link/P2P/PID.
f)
All: Selects whether only flags related with Parameter number, Block
index are displayed or not.
g)
Parameter number: Enter number to sort flags. 0~12 for high speed link,
0~12 for P2P, 0~63 for PID.
h)
Block index: Enter number to sort flags. 0~127 for high speed link, 0~63
for P2P.
i)
Global Variable: Displays global variable list. It is available to register as

EXTERNAL variable.
j)
New Variable: Recalls dialog box to add variable to local variable list.
k)
Edit Variable: Recalls dialog box to edit the selected variable.
l)
Delete Variable: Deletes the selected local variable from local variable
list.
m) OK: Saves entered or selected items and closes dialog box.

n)
674
Cancel: Closes the dialog box.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
a)
Variable: inputs variable name.
b)
Data Type: selects data type of variable.
c)
Variable Kind: selects Variable Kind of variable.
d)
Address: assigns direct address about variable.
e)
Initial Value: inputs initial value of variable.
f)
Trigger: inputs trigger status about variable.
g)
Retain: inputs Retain status about variable.
h)
Description: inputs Description about variable.
Inserts variable at the cursor location.
ATTENTION
If you select Select/Add Variable with cursor placed in the

empty area, you can add new variable.
If you select Select/Add Variable after selecting character

string, that character string is replaced into variable.
Inserting Function/Function Block

Insert Function/Function Block at the cursor location.
Perform the following steps to insert function or function block.
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor to insert.
Select Edit > Function/FB.

Honeywell
675
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
Name: Enters name of Function (Block) to use.
676
a)
Search: Searches Function (Block) about the entered name.
b)
List: Used for sorting Function, Function Block.
c)
Category: Indicates category of Function (Block).
d)
Function List: displays list of Function (Block) in the selected category.
e)
Function Information: Displays information of Function (Block). In case

of Function, it is available to set properties about input parameter. In
case of Function Block, it is available to set instance name and instance
class.
f)
OK: Applies the changes and closes window.
g)
Cancel: Closes window without saving application.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
18.4. Viewing Program
Step
3
Action
Function/Function Block is inserted.
ATTENTION
I/O parameters of function/function block are not inserted
automatically. You should edit them additionally.
18.4 Viewing Program

It describes about display properties in the ST program.
ST option
Perform the following steps to view ST option.
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select Tools > Options.
Select ST.

Honeywell
677
18. ST Edition
Step
678
Action
a)
Parameter information: When inserting Function//FB, example text of

IO parameter is added.
b)
Auto list members: When inserting character string by keyboard,

variable or Function/FB starting with same character are displayed.
c)
Auto macro statement: When inserting the control text of ST (IF,

WHILE, SWITCH), control text is completed according to ST grammar
d)
Tab size: Enters tab size.
e)
Show tip text: When cursor is on the character string in ST program,

description of character string is displayed.
f)
Auto indent: When changing line with ENTER, indent is applied

automatically with same tab size of previous line.
g)
Enhance: Character string used in ST program is displayed with various

colors according to variable, comment, Function (Block).

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
Font/Color
Used for designating the font or color in the ST program.
Perform the following steps to change the font in the ST program.
Step
Action
Select ST > Font/Color.
Change Font.
ATTENTION
You can not change the character size.
Default font is Fixedsys.
For more details, refer to Customizing SoftMaster.
Perform the following steps to change the color in the ST program.

Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select ST > font/color.
Change color.

Honeywell
679
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
ATTENTION
For more details, refer to chapter Customizing SoftMaster.
Zoom
ST program does not support Zoom function.
Tab
When using Tab, Tab size is designated.
Perform the following steps to change the tab size.
Step
680
Action
Select ST.
Change Tab size. The following screen shows the tab size 4.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
The following screen shows the tab size 8.
ATTENTION
Default tab size is 4.
Range of tab size is 1~100.
Showing line numbers

Shows/hides line numbers in the ST program.
Perform the following steps to show line numbers.
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select SoftMaster Common Editor.
Check Show line numbers.

Honeywell
681
18. ST Edition
18.5. Additional Edition Function
18.5 Additional Edition Function

Describes additional edition function.
Book mark
You can set and remove the bookmarks.
Setting book mark
Perform the following steps to set the bookmark.
Step
682
Action
Move the cursor to set bookmark.
Select Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
Removing Bookmark
Perform the following steps to remove the bookmark.
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Move the cursor to remove bookmark.
Select Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove.

Honeywell
683
18. ST Edition
Removing all bookmark

Perform the following steps to remove the bookmark
Step
1
Action
Select Edit > Bookmark > Remove All.
Previous bookmark
To go to previous bookmark,
Select Edit > Bookmark > Previous Bookmark.
Next bookmark
To go to next bookmark,
Select Edit > Bookmark > Next Bookmark.

ATTENTION
684
Bookmark is set by line unit.
Undo/Redo cannot cancel action about bookmark.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
Selection from character string list

When entering character string, displays the character string starting with same character
string and you need to select it properly.
Perform the following steps to select character string.
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Enter character string by keyboard.
Select character string from list.
Press Enter or double-click the character string.

Honeywell
685
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
ATTENTION
Following are the description of character string list bit map.
1.
: ST language key word (IF, CASE WHILE etc.)
2.
: Variable name
3.
: Flag variable name
4.
: Function name
5.
: Function block instance name
6.
: User defined-function name
7.
: User defined-function block instance name
Selecting member variable from character string list

It is used for selecting member variable from character string list by name of FB or user
data type instance.
Perform the following steps to select member variable from character string list.
Step
1
Action
Enter . after name of FB or user data type instance.
For example, instance name of TON is TON_Inst.
686
Select member variable to input.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
Press Enter or double click.
Setting/Removing Block Mask

Sets or removes the Block Mask area. The Block Mask area is not executed.
Block Mask area is indicated by symbol (* and *).
Setting Block Mask
Perform the following steps to set block mask.
Step
1
R200
11/09
Action
Select area to set Block Mask.

Honeywell
687
18. ST Edition
Step
688
Action
Select Edit > Set/Remove Block Mask.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
Removing Block Mask

Perform the following steps to remove block mask.
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select area in which Block Mask is already set.
Select Edit > Set/Remove Block Mask.

Honeywell
689
18. ST Edition
Setting/Removing Line Block Mask

Selected line is not executed.
Symbol// Is used to set Line Block Mask.
Setting line block mask
Perform the following steps to set line block mask.
Step
690
Action
Select area to set line block mask.
Select Edit > Set/Remove Line Block Mask.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
Removing line block mask

Perform the following steps to remove line block mask.
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select area to remove line block mask.
Select Edit > Set/Remove Line Block Mask.

Honeywell
691
18. ST Edition
Step
692
Action

Honeywell
R200
11/09
18. ST Edition
Indent/Outdent
Makes indent/outdent at the selected area.
Indent
Perform the following steps to make indent.
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Select area to make indent.
Press TAB.

Honeywell
693
18. ST Edition
Outdent
Perform the following steps to make outdent.
Step
694
Action
Select area to make outdent.
Press Shift + TAB.

Honeywell
R200
11/09
19. Event Input Module

19.1 Overview
The 2MLF-SOEA Module (event input module) is for the recording of the events entered
from outside. The event input module is a data recording device which can record event
information (time and state) in 1ms resolution. The event input module has not program
device or external device used in the CPU. The event input is available only for
monitoring and file saving using the SOE monitor.
2MLK/I/R CPU: save 3,000 events at maximum (Up to 3,000 events can be saved in
the order of occurrence.)
2MLF-SOEA module: save 300 event at maximum
Characteristics of SOE Monitor

1.
This is a software package for the operation and monitoring of the 2MLF-SOEA
module of 2MLT series.
2.
This package provides a function that enables independent operation of the SOE
monitor, regardless of the SoftMaster.
3.
This enables data monitoring and saving.
Functions of the SOE Monitor

The SOE monitor is an exclusive software package which runs on a PC platform and
communicates with the CPU of ML200 series for easy and fast operation of 2MLFSOEA.
The major functions of the SOE monitor are as follows.
R200
11/09
1.
Read/save event history
2.
Delete event history
3.
View module parameter setting
4.
Save event history in and Excel file

Honeywell
695

19.2. Screen Configuration
Files Created in the SOE Monitor

When you create and edit a project, the files having the extensions below are created.
<Name>.set: the logging file for the event the user has created. This file is created at
saving the event.
<Name>.xls: the module event file created by the user. Event record is saved in an
Excel file.
19.2 Screen Configuration

This section describes the basic screen elements, windows and pop-up menus.
On the Monitor menu, click SOE Monitoring in the SoftMaster monitor state. The
following figure displays.
696

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Field
Description
Menu
Basic menu is provided for using the software program.
Tools
Menu can be easily selected and executed with toolbar.
SOE
Shows the elements of the current project.
Event monitor
window
Shows the event information of the module selected in

the project.
Status bar
Shows the information of the event and connected PLC.
Menu structure
If you select a menu item, commands appear. The commands can be executed with
mouse or keyboard. Some menus provide shortcut keys.
File
Command
Description
New logging session
Create the project.
Open logging
Open an existing logging file.
Save logging as
Save the logging file with a different file name.
Export to file
Save the current logging data in an Excel file.
Exit
End the SOE monitor
View
Command
R200
11/09
Description
All events
Show all hidden events in an activated window.
Filtering
Show only the events meeting the filtering criteria.
Newest first
Show the data in the order of recent to old in the monitor

window.
Oldest first
Show the data in the order of old to recent in the monitor

window.
Find event
Search desired event.
Module Property
Show parameter setting (in online operation)

Honeywell
697

Online
Command
Description
Connect/Disconnect
Connect with or disconnect from the PLC.
Connection setting
Set up access method.
Clear PLC event history
Delete the event data saved in the PLC CPU memory.
Clear SOE module

event history
Delete the event data saved in the SOE module

memory.
Clear all SOE event

history
Delete all the event data saved in the memory of the

SOE module in the PLC system.
Refresh event
Load the event data of the SOE module.
Tool
Command
Description
Option
User can configure SOE monitor environment for user

convenience.
Customize
User defines tools and commands.
Window
Command
Description
New window
Open a new window in the activated window.
Cascade
Arrange the windows in the SoftMaster in cascade

layout.
Tile Horizontally
Arrange the windows in the SoftMaster in horizontal

layout.
Tile Vertically
Arrange the windows in the SoftMaster in vertical layout.
Close all
Close all the windows of the SoftMaster.
Help
Command
About SOE monitoring
698
Description
Provides the information on the SOE monitor.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Tools
Frequently used menu items are provided with respective shortcut keys (icons).You can
execute the menu by clicking the icon.
To create a new toolbar, perform the following steps.

Step
R200
11/09
Action
On the Tools menu, click Customize.
Click New. The New Toolbar dialog box appears.
Enter tool name.
Click OK button. A toolbar without tool is created.

Honeywell
699

Step
Action
Field
Description
Toolbars
Select/Clear the check box in front of the items to

make the toolbar appear/disappear.
New
Create a new toolbar.
Reset
Initialize the toolbar.
Select the Command tab.
Create a toolbar and click OK.
SOE Event History Window

The SOE monitor displays the 2MLF-SOEA module SOE event history window
automatically when connected with PLC CPU.
Double-click the desired module to run the event monitor window.
700

Honeywell
R200
11/09

CPU event history: Select the event saved in the CPU module.
Module event history: Select the event saved in the SOE module.
Double-click the CPU event history or module event history to activate the event monitor
window.
Status Bar
The following figure displays the status bar of SOE Monitoring window.
R200
11/09
Event No.: Shows the number of the events in the event monitor window.
PLC name: Shows the name of the PLC connected with the SOE monitor.
Online: Shows the PLC connection status of the SOE monitor.

Honeywell
701

19.3. Basic Parameter Setting
19.3 Basic Parameter Setting

Basic parameters of the 2MLF-SOEA can be set up using the menu or toolbar of the
SoftMaster.
Setting Items
Sets up the method of saving the history occurred in the 2MLF-SOEA module in the
CPU module.
In the project tree, click Parameter > Basic Parameter. The Basic parameter settings
screen appears.
702
Reset with recent History: Used for saving the most recent event. If there are more
than 3,000 events, the oldest event is deleted and the new event is saved.
Retain initial History: Used to maintain the first event. If there are more than 3,000
events, no new events will be saved.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

19.4. I/O Parameter Setting
19.4 I/O Parameter Setting

I/O parameters of the 2MLF-SOEA can be set up using the menu or toolbar of the
SoftMaster.
Setting Item
It sets up the method of saving the external event history in the 2MLF-SOEA module.
Perform the following steps to set I/O parameter.
Step
Action
In the project tree, click Parameter > I/O Parameter. The I/O Parameter
Setting screen appears.
In the I/O Parameter Setting window, click the slot of the base where the
module is mounted.
In the example below, the 2MLF-SOEA module is at #4 slot, #0 base.
R200
11/09
In the I/O Parameter Setting window, select the desired module from the
drop-down arrow.

Honeywell
703

704
Step
Action
After selecting the module, click Details. The SOE Module screen appears.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Step
Action
Field
Input Filter
Description
set up the time which enables an event to be
identified as an effective input data.
(Setting range: 1ms ~ 100ms)
SOE History
Reset with recent history: use this to save the

most recent event.
If the events exceed 300, the oldest event is
deleted and the last one is saved.
Retain initial history: use this to retain the first
event.
If the events exceed 300, the last one will not be
saved.
Event setting
details
Set up the input condition of the event.

Type: Rise, Fall or simultaneously, Rise/Fall of
event can be set up.
Event conditions can be set up for each input
contact point.
Chattering: Abnormal signals not related with
event can be processed as chattering.
(Setting range: 2~127)
Example of input filter setting

Condition is as follows.
Input filter: 1ms
Detail event setting: Rise/Fall events simultaneously
Sequence diagram of event occurrence is as follows.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
705

Chatter Setting
Chatter setting enables the module to identify an event repeated many times during a
short period of time as chattering, and not an effective event. Some sensors using
mechanical contacts may cause chattering, which can be eliminated with this function.
Setting items
706
1.
Number of events: 2~127 (0: detection is disabled)
2.
Event number: Enter the number of the events including the first effective signal
(min. 2)
3.
Chatter detection time (duration): If this chatter detection time is passed from the
time the first effective event was detected, the chatter detection function for the
specific event frequency is terminated, even if the set-up number of chattering is not
completed.
4.
Min. chatter detection time (duration): Co-related with the set up chattering event
number.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

In addition, since an event has passed the input filter, it should satisfy following criteria;
(Number of Events Input Filter Value) Chatter Detection Time (Duration)
or,
Input Filter Value (Chatter Detection Time (Duration) / Number of Events)
For example,
If, chatter detection time = 30ms, number of chattering events = 5,
30ms 5 = 6ms,
Therefore, the input filter must be less than 6ms.
Example of chatter setting
Condition:
Input filter: 1ms
Detail event setting: Rise event
Chatter event: 4
Chatter time: 8ms
Sequence diagram of event occurrence is as follows.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
707

19.5. View Module Information
Chatter time measurement: begins from the recognition of an event
Two of the four events passing the filter are ignored by chatter detection function.
The last event which enters after expiration of the chatter detection time is recorded
normally as the first event of a new period.
19.5 View Module Information

SoftMaster supports viewing event input module information.
To view module information, perform the following steps.
Step
1
708
Action
Click Online > Connect. After connecting to PLC, click Online > I/O
Information. The following screen appears.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

19.5. View Module Information
Step
R200
11/09
Action
Click Details. The module 2MLF-SOEA information as shown below.

Honeywell
709

19.6. Event History Monitor
19.6 Event History Monitor

The events entered into the CPU and event input modules can be monitored with the SOE
monitor.
To monitor event input modules with SOE monitor, perform the following steps.
Step
Action
Click Online-> Connect. The SOE Monitoring menu is activated only after
connecting to PLC.
Click Monitor > SOE Monitoring.
The SOE Monitoring screen appears.
710

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Step
Action
From the SOE Monitoring window, click Online > Connect.

The information of the event input module in the connected system appears.
CPU Event History: the event history stored in the CPU module.
Module Event History: the event history stored in the SOEA module.
Double-clicking the CPU event history or module event history will activate
the event monitor window.
R200
11/09
Double-click CPU Event History and click Online > Refresh Event.
Double-click Module Event History and click Online > Refresh Event.
Event history information:

Honeywell
711

Step
712
Action
Click View > All Event to search and compare all events.
Click View > Filtering to search the behavior of a specific event.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Step
Action
Field
R200
11/09
Description
Specify Event
Occurred Position
Specify the bit at which the event has occurred.
Event type
Specify the input condition at which the event has

occurred.
Show SOE
installed position
only
Used only for CPU event history filtering. Only the

base and slot of event input module appears.
Base/Slot
Used only for CPU event history filtering. Specifies

base and slot.
Begin/End
Specify the event filter with the time and the first
event, and the last event.

Honeywell
713

Example of Event filter

Event occurrence point filter setting:
Filtering result:
#0 bit
Event occurrence point setting: No. 0 bit
Event type setting: Rise event.
Rise Event
You can also filter events based on Base and Occurred time.
Prioritizing Events
714
Priority to the recent events: the recent events have priority over the old events in
the display list.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Priority to old events: the old events have priority over the recent events in the
display list.
To view the recent events first, click View > Newest First.
From recent to older events
To view the old events first, click View > Oldest First.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
715

From old to recent events
Comparing Events
Compare the events stored in the CPU and event input modules and show the result.
To compare the events, click View > Compare Event.
716

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Deleting Event history

Delete CPU history: the history stored in the CPU module is deleted.
To delete CPU history,
Click Online > Clear PLC Event History.
To delete the history stored in the module,
Click Online > Clear SOE Module Event History
To delete the history stored in all the SOEA modules,
Click Online > Clear All SOE module History.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
717

19.7. Save as an Excel File
19.7 Save as an Excel File

This section describes how to save an event file as an Excel file.
To save an event file as an excel file, perform the following steps.
Step
Action
Select the event history to be converted into an Excel file in the event monitor
window.
Click File > Export to file.
Enter a new file name in the Save As dialog.
Click Save to create a new Excel file.
ATTENTION
The conversion to an Excel file is effective only for the currently
active main screen (one window).
5
718
Open file in the Excel application (to read the saved event file in Excel).

Honeywell
R200
11/09
20. Dedicated ML200R Function

20.1 Redundancy Parameter
On Project Window, double-click Redundancy Parameter to set redundancy
parameter as shown in the following window.
Redundancy parameter is consisting of Run Mode and Redundancy synchronization

area as shown in the following dialog box.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
719

20.1. Redundancy Parameter
The following table describes all the fields in the Redundancy Parameter dialog box.
Field
720
Description
Disable the warning

message about Single
CPU Mode
If Master CPU is operated without standby CPU, the

warning message of redundancy system appears. If it is
checked, the warning message does not appear. The
default value is appearing warning message.
Extended Base Detach

Error
When extended base is detached, it decides whether it is

considered as error or entire system goes to initial status
and restarts the operation when extended base is
attached again. The default value is that entire system
goes to initial status and restarts the operation when
extended base is attached again.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

20.1. Redundancy Parameter
Field
R200
11/09
Description
I/Q Base
It synchronizes a data of I/Q Base data. It can set from

the first base to the final base. By checking the box, it
determines whether synchronizing I/Q area or not. If it is
checked, it synchronizes from first base to final base.
The default value is 0~31 base.
M Area
It synchronizes data of M area. It can set from the

position of first word to the position of final ward. By
checking the box, it determines whether synchronizing M
area or not. If it is checked, it synchronizes from first area
to final area. The default value is %MW0~%MW2000.
R Area
It synchronizes data of R area. It can set from the

position of first word to the position of final ward. By
checking the box, it determines whether synchronizing R
area or not. If it is checked, it synchronizes from first area
to final area. The default value is %RW0~%RW2000.
W Area
If R area is set, synchronization area of W defines

automatically.
PID Block
It synchronizes data of PID block. It can set from the first

block to final block. By checking the box, it determines
whether synchronizing PID block area or not. If it is
checked, it synchronizes from block area to final block
area. The default value is 0 block.
Default
Initialized to Default setting.
OK
Saves the setting value of Run mode and Redundancy

synchronization area.
Cancel
Cancels the setting value of Run mode and Redundancy

synchronization area.

Honeywell
721

20.2. Redundancy PLC State Window
20.2 Redundancy PLC State Window

Redundancy PLC state window appears automatically when SoftMaster connects with
2MLR PLC.
The following table describes the fields in the Redundancy PLC state window.
Field
722
Description
Project name of SoftMaster or Program name of SoftMasterNM/System Monitor
A-side PLC Run mode
A-side PLC Warning: No-display if warning is not existed.
A-side PLC error: No-display if error is not existed.
Standby CPU image: Shaded PLC
CPU status display: Standby, A-side
Signal line: 1 line Bus topology, 2 lines Ring topology
CPU status display: Master, B-side
B-side PLC error: No-display if warning is not existed.
B-side PLC warning: No-display if error is not existed
B-side PLC Run mode

Honeywell
R200
11/09

20.3. Control Redundancy
Field
l
Description
Master CPU image: Colored PLC
20.3 Control Redundancy

To control redundancy,
Select Online > Control Redundancy.
Change of master CPU
The following table describes the fields in the Redundancy control window.
Field
R200
11/09
Description
Master CPU
Display of Master CPU, A-side or B-side
You can switchover the Master CPU
It displays state of redundancy

changeable state. If it is disable, it
displays the possible case to make
redundancy change.
Change
Redundancy change command. If

redundancy change is not disabling, it
Honeywell
723

20.3. Control Redundancy
Field
Description
displays by inactive mode.
ATTENTION
In case Redundancy state is changeable,
1.
When the Master CPU is in stop mode
2.
When the Master CPU has error
3.
When the redundancy system is in run mode
Standby CPU control
The following table describes the fields of the Standby CPU in the Redundancy Control
window.
Field
724
Description
The Standby CPU is available: Available Standby CPU state
Standby CPU mode: Standby CPU Run/Stop mode change
Standby CPU mode: Only Standby CPU Reset or Overall reset

Honeywell
R200
11/09

20.4 System Monitoring

System configuration and base information is displayed by System Monitoring.
System Configuration
To perform system configuration, Select PLC.> System Configuration.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
725

System configuration contains below information.
726
1.
Connection state between base
2.
Connection cable type between base
3.
In case of electric cable, it displays measured time and distance.
4.
It displays data synchronization cable between Master and Standby CPU.
5.
It displays base information of selecting base by clicking mouse button (or pressing
enter key).

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Node Count Change

Node Count Change makes to decide how many nodes displays in window.
To change Node Count,
Select View > Node Count, then selects node among [2], [3], [4], [5], [6].
Default setting value is 2.
To view node count [2], select View > Node Count - [2].
R200
11/09

Honeywell
727

To view node count [4], select View > Node Count - [4].
Base Information
It displays base information installed in base.
728

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Master/Standby base
The above diagram displays the following.
R200
11/09
1.
It displays information and base number of CPU module.
2.
State indicator: It indicates state of CPU.
3.
RING: If it is consisted of Ring topology, LED indicates On.
4.
RED: If it is operated by Redundancy operation, LED indicates On.
5.
MASTER: If it is master mode, LED is On.
6.
CPU-A: If CPU-A is On, LED indicates On.
7.
CPU-B: If CPU-B is On, LED indicates On.
8.
RUN: If operation mode is Run mode, LED indicates On.

Honeywell
729

9.
STOP: If operation mode is Stop mode, LED indicates On.
10.
WAR: Warning is occurred in CPU, LED indicates On.
11. ERR: Error is occurred in CPU, LED indicates On.

12. Key state: Key state information of CPU.
Expansion base
It displays base number of expansion module.
Base information
730
1.
Base information contains the information of base connection and cable.
2.
By selecting expansion drive module/expansion manager and PLC > Module

Information, Base information appears.
3.
By Double-clicking expansion drive module/expansion manager, Base information

appears.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

The above diagram displays the following.

1.
Base Number: Base number which is set in the switch of base setting for expansion
drive module
2.
O/S version: OS version of expansion drive module
3.
Node Status: It displays connection status between bases whether it is Ring or Bus
operation.
4.
Base Total Count: Total number of nodes
5.
Port 1 Number: Base number connected with port 1
6.
Port 1 Cable: Cable type (Optic/Electric) connected with port 1. In case of Electric
cable, it displays the measured length of cable for port 1.
7.
Port 1 Date: In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured date for port 1.
8.
Port 2 Number: Base number connected with port 2.
9.
Port 2 Cable: Cable type (Optic/Electric) connected with port 2. In case of Electric
cable, it displays the measured length of cable for port 1.
10. Port 2 Date: In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured date for port 1.
R200
11/09

Honeywell
731

Base Changing Wizard

Base can be changed easily by Base Changing Wizard while PLC is operating. Base
Changing Wizard has 4 steps Selecting Base, Removing Base, Installing New Base, and
Changing Base Finished.
ATTENTION
In 2MLR system, a part of expansion base can be exchanged according to
configuration of expansion base.
Ring topology: All expansion bases can be exchanged.
Bus topology: In Bus topology, final expansion base is only changed..
Perform the following steps to change base.

Step
732
Action
Selects Online > Base Changing Wizard.
In Selecting Base step, selects base for changing and click Next button.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Step
Action
Field
Description
Information: Information of Selecting Base step.
Base module tree: It displays base module. Changeable base

is displayed according to connection state of expansion base.
(
: Changeable base,
: Non-changeable base )
List of module on slot: It displays the information of module

on selected base.
Back: It is always inactive mode while selecting base step.
Next: Next step to Removing Base step. It is active mode

when changeable base is selected.
Cancel: Cancel Base Changing Wizard execution.
ATTNTION
If Base Changing Wizard execution is canceled, selected base is
excluded from operation. Ensure to check Fault Mask and I/O Skip.
3
R200
11/09
Follow the information of Removing Base step, click Next button.

Honeywell
733

Step
Action
Field
Description
Information: Information of Removing Base step.
Back: Cancel Removing Base step, go to previous step.
Next: Move to Installing Base step.
Cancel: Cancel Base Changing Wizard.
ATTENTION
Error in Removing Base is occurred when base is not removed.
4
734
Follow the information of Installing New Base step, click Next button.
Honeywell
R200
11/09

Step
Action
Field
Description
Information: Information of Installing New Base.
Back: It is inactive mode after base is removed.
Next: Move to Changing Base Finished step.
Cancel: Cancel the Base Changing Wizard.
ATTENTION
Error in Installing New Base is occurred when base is not installed. If
base is installed normally, error is occurred when module type is
different within setting module in I/O parameter and real installed
R200
11/09

Honeywell
735

Step
Action
base.
736
Click Finished, when Changing Base is finished.

Honeywell
R200
11/09

Step
Action
Field
R200
11/09
Description
Information: Information of Changing Base Finished.
Back: It is inactive mode after base is removed.
Finish: Finish Base Changing Wizard.

Honeywell
737

Step
Action
ATTENTION
Follow the below steps when base changing without Base Changing
Wizard.
1.
Set I/O Skip setting to change on base.
2.
Set Fault Mask on base.
3.
Remove the base from PLC.
4.
Install the base to change.
5.
Release I/O Skip setting on corresponding base.
6.
Select Online > PLC Errors/Warnings, Check the error in

base.
7.
Select Online > I/O Information, Check the module is installed

normally.
8.
If there is no error, release the Fault Mask on corresponding

base.
Refer to 2MLR CPU Users Manual for more explanation.
738

Honeywell
R200
11/09
21. Warranty
21.1 Terms of warranty
LSIS provides an 18-month warranty starting from the date of production.
21.2 Range of warranty

For problems within the terms of the warranty, LSIS replaces the entire PLC or repair the
defective parts free of charge except for the following cases.
R200
11/09
1.
Problems caused by improper conditions, environment or treatment.
2.
Problems caused by external devices.
3.
Problems caused by the user remodeling or repairing the PLC.
4.
Problems caused by improper use of the product.
5.
Problems caused by circumstances where the expectations exceed that of the

science and technology level when LSIS produced the product.
6.
Problems caused by natural disaster.
7.
Warranty is limited to the PLC itself only. It is not valid for the whole system which
the PLC is attached to.

Honeywell
739
21. Warranty
21.2. Range of warranty
740

Honeywell
R200
11/09
Honeywell International
Process Solutions
2500 West Union Hills
Phoenix, AZ 85027

UG SoftMaster 200 V1.7

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UG SoftMaster 200 V1.7

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UG SoftMaster 200 V1.7

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Honeywell Process Solutions

Notices and Trademarks

SoftMaster User's Guide

About This Document

SoftMaster User's Guide - ML200

WWW Address (URL)

SoftMaster User's Guide

Honeywell IAC Solution

Honeywell Global TAC Pacific

Honeywell Global TAC India

Honeywell Global TAC Korea

Honeywell Global TAC China

+86-10-8458-3280 ext. 361

Honeywell Global TAC South East Asia

Honeywell Global TAC Taiwan

Honeywell Global TAC Japan

Call your nearest

SoftMaster User's Guide

Acronyms & definitions

Acronyms & definitions

Analog to Digital Conversion

Base is the back plane of the PLC on which the power

Binary Coded Decimal

This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the

Central Processing Unit

Digital to Analog Conversion

Memory area which can be directly accessed with IEC

Fast Ethernet Network.

Is an operation unit that immediately outputs the operation

Is an operation unit, that memorizes the operation results

High Speed Link Service in MasterLogic-200

Acronyms & definitions

I/O image area

Internal memory area of CPU module installed to maintain

International Electrotechnical Commission

Interrupt driven task programs executed on meeting a

Least Significant Bit

A standard component with a specific function to configure

Most Significant Bit

Point to Point Service in MasterLogic-200 communication

Process Automation Controller

Programmable Logic Controller

A system consisting of a PLC, CPU, modules and

Random Access Memory

Acronyms & definitions

As an abbreviation of Real Time Clock, it is collectively

Real Time Clock

Serial Link Network.

Programming tool for creating, editing, and debugging a

Shielded Twisted Pair

Named Variables which are declared with a name, type

Twisted Pair cables (typically CAT5 cables with RJ45

Unshield Twisted Pair

This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the

A timer to monitor pre-determined execution time of a

SoftMaster User's Guide

Acronyms & definitions

SoftMaster User's Guide

TIP: Identifies advice or hints for the user, often in terms of